blob: c5dd0b3a80de5dcd83f01ba580a14ac7b6b95cac [file] [log] [blame]
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02001 ----------------------
2 HAProxy
3 Configuration Manual
4 ----------------------
Willy Tarreau79158882009-06-09 11:59:08 +02005 version 1.4
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006 willy tarreau
Willy Tarreaub05613d2010-02-02 10:18:28 +01007 2010/02/02
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02008
9
10This document covers the configuration language as implemented in the version
11specified above. It does not provide any hint, example or advice. For such
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +010012documentation, please refer to the Reference Manual or the Architecture Manual.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020013The summary below is meant to help you search sections by name and navigate
14through the document.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +020015
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020016Note to documentation contributors :
17 This document is formated with 80 columns per line, with even number of
18 spaces for indentation and without tabs. Please follow these rules strictly
19 so that it remains easily printable everywhere. If a line needs to be
20 printed verbatim and does not fit, please end each line with a backslash
21 ('\') and continue on next line. If you add sections, please update the
22 summary below for easier searching.
23
24
25Summary
26-------
27
281. Quick reminder about HTTP
291.1. The HTTP transaction model
301.2. HTTP request
311.2.1. The Request line
321.2.2. The request headers
331.3. HTTP response
341.3.1. The Response line
351.3.2. The response headers
36
372. Configuring HAProxy
382.1. Configuration file format
392.2. Time format
40
413. Global parameters
423.1. Process management and security
433.2. Performance tuning
443.3. Debugging
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100453.4. Userlists
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020046
474. Proxies
484.1. Proxy keywords matrix
494.2. Alphabetically sorted keywords reference
50
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +0100515. Server and default-server options
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020052
536. HTTP header manipulation
54
557. Using ACLs
567.1. Matching integers
577.2. Matching strings
587.3. Matching regular expressions (regexes)
597.4. Matching IPv4 addresses
607.5. Available matching criteria
617.5.1. Matching at Layer 4 and below
627.5.2. Matching contents at Layer 4
637.5.3. Matching at Layer 7
647.6. Pre-defined ACLs
657.7. Using ACLs to form conditions
66
678. Logging
688.1. Log levels
698.2. Log formats
708.2.1. Default log format
718.2.2. TCP log format
728.2.3. HTTP log format
738.3. Advanced logging options
748.3.1. Disabling logging of external tests
758.3.2. Logging before waiting for the session to terminate
768.3.3. Raising log level upon errors
778.3.4. Disabling logging of successful connections
788.4. Timing events
798.5. Session state at disconnection
808.6. Non-printable characters
818.7. Capturing HTTP cookies
828.8. Capturing HTTP headers
838.9. Examples of logs
84
859. Statistics and monitoring
869.1. CSV format
879.2. Unix Socket commands
88
89
901. Quick reminder about HTTP
91----------------------------
92
93When haproxy is running in HTTP mode, both the request and the response are
94fully analyzed and indexed, thus it becomes possible to build matching criteria
95on almost anything found in the contents.
96
97However, it is important to understand how HTTP requests and responses are
98formed, and how HAProxy decomposes them. It will then become easier to write
99correct rules and to debug existing configurations.
100
101
1021.1. The HTTP transaction model
103-------------------------------
104
105The HTTP protocol is transaction-driven. This means that each request will lead
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100106to one and only one response. Traditionally, a TCP connection is established
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200107from the client to the server, a request is sent by the client on the
108connection, the server responds and the connection is closed. A new request
109will involve a new connection :
110
111 [CON1] [REQ1] ... [RESP1] [CLO1] [CON2] [REQ2] ... [RESP2] [CLO2] ...
112
113In this mode, called the "HTTP close" mode, there are as many connection
114establishments as there are HTTP transactions. Since the connection is closed
115by the server after the response, the client does not need to know the content
116length.
117
118Due to the transactional nature of the protocol, it was possible to improve it
119to avoid closing a connection between two subsequent transactions. In this mode
120however, it is mandatory that the server indicates the content length for each
121response so that the client does not wait indefinitely. For this, a special
122header is used: "Content-length". This mode is called the "keep-alive" mode :
123
124 [CON] [REQ1] ... [RESP1] [REQ2] ... [RESP2] [CLO] ...
125
126Its advantages are a reduced latency between transactions, and less processing
127power required on the server side. It is generally better than the close mode,
128but not always because the clients often limit their concurrent connections to
129a smaller value. HAProxy currently does not support the HTTP keep-alive mode,
130but knows how to transform it to the close mode.
131
132A last improvement in the communications is the pipelining mode. It still uses
133keep-alive, but the client does not wait for the first response to send the
134second request. This is useful for fetching large number of images composing a
135page :
136
137 [CON] [REQ1] [REQ2] ... [RESP1] [RESP2] [CLO] ...
138
139This can obviously have a tremendous benefit on performance because the network
140latency is eliminated between subsequent requests. Many HTTP agents do not
141correctly support pipelining since there is no way to associate a response with
142the corresponding request in HTTP. For this reason, it is mandatory for the
143server to reply in the exact same order as the requests were received.
144
145Right now, HAProxy only supports the first mode (HTTP close) if it needs to
146process the request. This means that for each request, there will be one TCP
147connection. If keep-alive or pipelining are required, HAProxy will still
148support them, but will only see the first request and the first response of
149each transaction. While this is generally problematic with regards to logs,
150content switching or filtering, it most often causes no problem for persistence
151with cookie insertion.
152
153
1541.2. HTTP request
155-----------------
156
157First, let's consider this HTTP request :
158
159 Line Contents
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100160 number
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200161 1 GET /serv/login.php?lang=en&profile=2 HTTP/1.1
162 2 Host: www.mydomain.com
163 3 User-agent: my small browser
164 4 Accept: image/jpeg, image/gif
165 5 Accept: image/png
166
167
1681.2.1. The Request line
169-----------------------
170
171Line 1 is the "request line". It is always composed of 3 fields :
172
173 - a METHOD : GET
174 - a URI : /serv/login.php?lang=en&profile=2
175 - a version tag : HTTP/1.1
176
177All of them are delimited by what the standard calls LWS (linear white spaces),
178which are commonly spaces, but can also be tabs or line feeds/carriage returns
179followed by spaces/tabs. The method itself cannot contain any colon (':') and
180is limited to alphabetic letters. All those various combinations make it
181desirable that HAProxy performs the splitting itself rather than leaving it to
182the user to write a complex or inaccurate regular expression.
183
184The URI itself can have several forms :
185
186 - A "relative URI" :
187
188 /serv/login.php?lang=en&profile=2
189
190 It is a complete URL without the host part. This is generally what is
191 received by servers, reverse proxies and transparent proxies.
192
193 - An "absolute URI", also called a "URL" :
194
195 http://192.168.0.12:8080/serv/login.php?lang=en&profile=2
196
197 It is composed of a "scheme" (the protocol name followed by '://'), a host
198 name or address, optionally a colon (':') followed by a port number, then
199 a relative URI beginning at the first slash ('/') after the address part.
200 This is generally what proxies receive, but a server supporting HTTP/1.1
201 must accept this form too.
202
203 - a star ('*') : this form is only accepted in association with the OPTIONS
204 method and is not relayable. It is used to inquiry a next hop's
205 capabilities.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100206
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200207 - an address:port combination : 192.168.0.12:80
208 This is used with the CONNECT method, which is used to establish TCP
209 tunnels through HTTP proxies, generally for HTTPS, but sometimes for
210 other protocols too.
211
212In a relative URI, two sub-parts are identified. The part before the question
213mark is called the "path". It is typically the relative path to static objects
214on the server. The part after the question mark is called the "query string".
215It is mostly used with GET requests sent to dynamic scripts and is very
216specific to the language, framework or application in use.
217
218
2191.2.2. The request headers
220--------------------------
221
222The headers start at the second line. They are composed of a name at the
223beginning of the line, immediately followed by a colon (':'). Traditionally,
224an LWS is added after the colon but that's not required. Then come the values.
225Multiple identical headers may be folded into one single line, delimiting the
226values with commas, provided that their order is respected. This is commonly
227encountered in the "Cookie:" field. A header may span over multiple lines if
228the subsequent lines begin with an LWS. In the example in 1.2, lines 4 and 5
229define a total of 3 values for the "Accept:" header.
230
231Contrary to a common mis-conception, header names are not case-sensitive, and
232their values are not either if they refer to other header names (such as the
233"Connection:" header).
234
235The end of the headers is indicated by the first empty line. People often say
236that it's a double line feed, which is not exact, even if a double line feed
237is one valid form of empty line.
238
239Fortunately, HAProxy takes care of all these complex combinations when indexing
240headers, checking values and counting them, so there is no reason to worry
241about the way they could be written, but it is important not to accuse an
242application of being buggy if it does unusual, valid things.
243
244Important note:
245 As suggested by RFC2616, HAProxy normalizes headers by replacing line breaks
246 in the middle of headers by LWS in order to join multi-line headers. This
247 is necessary for proper analysis and helps less capable HTTP parsers to work
248 correctly and not to be fooled by such complex constructs.
249
250
2511.3. HTTP response
252------------------
253
254An HTTP response looks very much like an HTTP request. Both are called HTTP
255messages. Let's consider this HTTP response :
256
257 Line Contents
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100258 number
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200259 1 HTTP/1.1 200 OK
260 2 Content-length: 350
261 3 Content-Type: text/html
262
Willy Tarreau816b9792009-09-15 21:25:21 +0200263As a special case, HTTP supports so called "Informational responses" as status
264codes 1xx. These messages are special in that they don't convey any part of the
265response, they're just used as sort of a signaling message to ask a client to
Willy Tarreau5843d1a2010-02-01 15:13:32 +0100266continue to post its request for instance. In the case of a status 100 response
267the requested information will be carried by the next non-100 response message
268following the informational one. This implies that multiple responses may be
269sent to a single request, and that this only works when keep-alive is enabled
270(1xx messages are HTTP/1.1 only). HAProxy handles these messages and is able to
271correctly forward and skip them, and only process the next non-100 response. As
272such, these messages are neither logged nor transformed, unless explicitly
273state otherwise. Status 101 messages indicate that the protocol is changing
274over the same connection and that haproxy must switch to tunnel mode, just as
275if a CONNECT had occurred. Then the Upgrade header would contain additional
276information about the type of protocol the connection is switching to.
Willy Tarreau816b9792009-09-15 21:25:21 +0200277
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200278
2791.3.1. The Response line
280------------------------
281
282Line 1 is the "response line". It is always composed of 3 fields :
283
284 - a version tag : HTTP/1.1
285 - a status code : 200
286 - a reason : OK
287
288The status code is always 3-digit. The first digit indicates a general status :
Willy Tarreau816b9792009-09-15 21:25:21 +0200289 - 1xx = informational message to be skipped (eg: 100, 101)
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200290 - 2xx = OK, content is following (eg: 200, 206)
291 - 3xx = OK, no content following (eg: 302, 304)
292 - 4xx = error caused by the client (eg: 401, 403, 404)
293 - 5xx = error caused by the server (eg: 500, 502, 503)
294
295Please refer to RFC2616 for the detailed meaning of all such codes. The
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100296"reason" field is just a hint, but is not parsed by clients. Anything can be
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200297found there, but it's a common practice to respect the well-established
298messages. It can be composed of one or multiple words, such as "OK", "Found",
299or "Authentication Required".
300
301Haproxy may emit the following status codes by itself :
302
303 Code When / reason
304 200 access to stats page, and when replying to monitoring requests
305 301 when performing a redirection, depending on the configured code
306 302 when performing a redirection, depending on the configured code
307 303 when performing a redirection, depending on the configured code
308 400 for an invalid or too large request
309 401 when an authentication is required to perform the action (when
310 accessing the stats page)
311 403 when a request is forbidden by a "block" ACL or "reqdeny" filter
312 408 when the request timeout strikes before the request is complete
313 500 when haproxy encounters an unrecoverable internal error, such as a
314 memory allocation failure, which should never happen
315 502 when the server returns an empty, invalid or incomplete response, or
316 when an "rspdeny" filter blocks the response.
317 503 when no server was available to handle the request, or in response to
318 monitoring requests which match the "monitor fail" condition
319 504 when the response timeout strikes before the server responds
320
321The error 4xx and 5xx codes above may be customized (see "errorloc" in section
3224.2).
323
324
3251.3.2. The response headers
326---------------------------
327
328Response headers work exactly like request headers, and as such, HAProxy uses
329the same parsing function for both. Please refer to paragraph 1.2.2 for more
330details.
331
332
3332. Configuring HAProxy
334----------------------
335
3362.1. Configuration file format
337------------------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200338
339HAProxy's configuration process involves 3 major sources of parameters :
340
341 - the arguments from the command-line, which always take precedence
342 - the "global" section, which sets process-wide parameters
343 - the proxies sections which can take form of "defaults", "listen",
344 "frontend" and "backend".
345
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100346The configuration file syntax consists in lines beginning with a keyword
347referenced in this manual, optionally followed by one or several parameters
348delimited by spaces. If spaces have to be entered in strings, then they must be
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100349preceded by a backslash ('\') to be escaped. Backslashes also have to be
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100350escaped by doubling them.
351
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200352
3532.2. Time format
354----------------
355
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100356Some parameters involve values representing time, such as timeouts. These
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100357values are generally expressed in milliseconds (unless explicitly stated
358otherwise) but may be expressed in any other unit by suffixing the unit to the
359numeric value. It is important to consider this because it will not be repeated
360for every keyword. Supported units are :
361
362 - us : microseconds. 1 microsecond = 1/1000000 second
363 - ms : milliseconds. 1 millisecond = 1/1000 second. This is the default.
364 - s : seconds. 1s = 1000ms
365 - m : minutes. 1m = 60s = 60000ms
366 - h : hours. 1h = 60m = 3600s = 3600000ms
367 - d : days. 1d = 24h = 1440m = 86400s = 86400000ms
368
369
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003703. Global parameters
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200371--------------------
372
373Parameters in the "global" section are process-wide and often OS-specific. They
374are generally set once for all and do not need being changed once correct. Some
375of them have command-line equivalents.
376
377The following keywords are supported in the "global" section :
378
379 * Process management and security
380 - chroot
381 - daemon
382 - gid
383 - group
384 - log
385 - nbproc
386 - pidfile
387 - uid
388 - ulimit-n
389 - user
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200390 - stats
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +0200391 - node
392 - description
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100393
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200394 * Performance tuning
395 - maxconn
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100396 - maxpipes
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200397 - noepoll
398 - nokqueue
399 - nopoll
400 - nosepoll
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100401 - nosplice
Willy Tarreaufe255b72007-10-14 23:09:26 +0200402 - spread-checks
Willy Tarreau27a674e2009-08-17 07:23:33 +0200403 - tune.bufsize
Willy Tarreaua0250ba2008-01-06 11:22:57 +0100404 - tune.maxaccept
405 - tune.maxpollevents
Willy Tarreau27a674e2009-08-17 07:23:33 +0200406 - tune.maxrewrite
Willy Tarreaue803de22010-01-21 17:43:04 +0100407 - tune.rcvbuf.client
408 - tune.rcvbuf.server
409 - tune.sndbuf.client
410 - tune.sndbuf.server
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100411
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200412 * Debugging
413 - debug
414 - quiet
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200415
416
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004173.1. Process management and security
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200418------------------------------------
419
420chroot <jail dir>
421 Changes current directory to <jail dir> and performs a chroot() there before
422 dropping privileges. This increases the security level in case an unknown
423 vulnerability would be exploited, since it would make it very hard for the
424 attacker to exploit the system. This only works when the process is started
425 with superuser privileges. It is important to ensure that <jail_dir> is both
426 empty and unwritable to anyone.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100427
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200428daemon
429 Makes the process fork into background. This is the recommended mode of
430 operation. It is equivalent to the command line "-D" argument. It can be
431 disabled by the command line "-db" argument.
432
433gid <number>
434 Changes the process' group ID to <number>. It is recommended that the group
435 ID is dedicated to HAProxy or to a small set of similar daemons. HAProxy must
436 be started with a user belonging to this group, or with superuser privileges.
437 See also "group" and "uid".
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100438
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200439group <group name>
440 Similar to "gid" but uses the GID of group name <group name> from /etc/group.
441 See also "gid" and "user".
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100442
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +0200443log <address> <facility> [max level [min level]]
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200444 Adds a global syslog server. Up to two global servers can be defined. They
445 will receive logs for startups and exits, as well as all logs from proxies
Robert Tsai81ae1952007-12-05 10:47:29 +0100446 configured with "log global".
447
448 <address> can be one of:
449
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +0100450 - An IPv4 address optionally followed by a colon and a UDP port. If
Robert Tsai81ae1952007-12-05 10:47:29 +0100451 no port is specified, 514 is used by default (the standard syslog
452 port).
453
454 - A filesystem path to a UNIX domain socket, keeping in mind
455 considerations for chroot (be sure the path is accessible inside
456 the chroot) and uid/gid (be sure the path is appropriately
457 writeable).
458
459 <facility> must be one of the 24 standard syslog facilities :
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200460
461 kern user mail daemon auth syslog lpr news
462 uucp cron auth2 ftp ntp audit alert cron2
463 local0 local1 local2 local3 local4 local5 local6 local7
464
465 An optional level can be specified to filter outgoing messages. By default,
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +0200466 all messages are sent. If a maximum level is specified, only messages with a
467 severity at least as important as this level will be sent. An optional minimum
468 level can be specified. If it is set, logs emitted with a more severe level
469 than this one will be capped to this level. This is used to avoid sending
470 "emerg" messages on all terminals on some default syslog configurations.
471 Eight levels are known :
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200472
473 emerg alert crit err warning notice info debug
474
475nbproc <number>
476 Creates <number> processes when going daemon. This requires the "daemon"
477 mode. By default, only one process is created, which is the recommended mode
478 of operation. For systems limited to small sets of file descriptors per
479 process, it may be needed to fork multiple daemons. USING MULTIPLE PROCESSES
480 IS HARDER TO DEBUG AND IS REALLY DISCOURAGED. See also "daemon".
481
482pidfile <pidfile>
483 Writes pids of all daemons into file <pidfile>. This option is equivalent to
484 the "-p" command line argument. The file must be accessible to the user
485 starting the process. See also "daemon".
486
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200487stats socket <path> [{uid | user} <uid>] [{gid | group} <gid>] [mode <mode>]
Willy Tarreau6162db22009-10-10 17:13:00 +0200488 [level <level>]
489
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200490 Creates a UNIX socket in stream mode at location <path>. Any previously
491 existing socket will be backed up then replaced. Connections to this socket
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100492 will return various statistics outputs and even allow some commands to be
Willy Tarreau6162db22009-10-10 17:13:00 +0200493 issued. Please consult section 9.2 "Unix Socket commands" for more details.
494
495 An optional "level" parameter can be specified to restrict the nature of
496 the commands that can be issued on the socket :
497 - "user" is the least privileged level ; only non-sensitive stats can be
498 read, and no change is allowed. It would make sense on systems where it
499 is not easy to restrict access to the socket.
500
501 - "operator" is the default level and fits most common uses. All data can
502 be read, and only non-sensible changes are permitted (eg: clear max
503 counters).
504
505 - "admin" should be used with care, as everything is permitted (eg: clear
506 all counters).
Willy Tarreaua8efd362008-01-03 10:19:15 +0100507
508 On platforms which support it, it is possible to restrict access to this
509 socket by specifying numerical IDs after "uid" and "gid", or valid user and
510 group names after the "user" and "group" keywords. It is also possible to
511 restrict permissions on the socket by passing an octal value after the "mode"
512 keyword (same syntax as chmod). Depending on the platform, the permissions on
513 the socket will be inherited from the directory which hosts it, or from the
514 user the process is started with.
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200515
516stats timeout <timeout, in milliseconds>
517 The default timeout on the stats socket is set to 10 seconds. It is possible
518 to change this value with "stats timeout". The value must be passed in
Willy Tarreaubefdff12007-12-02 22:27:38 +0100519 milliseconds, or be suffixed by a time unit among { us, ms, s, m, h, d }.
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200520
521stats maxconn <connections>
522 By default, the stats socket is limited to 10 concurrent connections. It is
523 possible to change this value with "stats maxconn".
524
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200525uid <number>
526 Changes the process' user ID to <number>. It is recommended that the user ID
527 is dedicated to HAProxy or to a small set of similar daemons. HAProxy must
528 be started with superuser privileges in order to be able to switch to another
529 one. See also "gid" and "user".
530
531ulimit-n <number>
532 Sets the maximum number of per-process file-descriptors to <number>. By
533 default, it is automatically computed, so it is recommended not to use this
534 option.
535
536user <user name>
537 Similar to "uid" but uses the UID of user name <user name> from /etc/passwd.
538 See also "uid" and "group".
539
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +0200540node <name>
541 Only letters, digits, hyphen and underscore are allowed, like in DNS names.
542
543 This statement is useful in HA configurations where two or more processes or
544 servers share the same IP address. By setting a different node-name on all
545 nodes, it becomes easy to immediately spot what server is handling the
546 traffic.
547
548description <text>
549 Add a text that describes the instance.
550
551 Please note that it is required to escape certain characters (# for example)
552 and this text is inserted into a html page so you should avoid using
553 "<" and ">" characters.
554
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200555
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005563.2. Performance tuning
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200557-----------------------
558
559maxconn <number>
560 Sets the maximum per-process number of concurrent connections to <number>. It
561 is equivalent to the command-line argument "-n". Proxies will stop accepting
562 connections when this limit is reached. The "ulimit-n" parameter is
563 automatically adjusted according to this value. See also "ulimit-n".
564
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100565maxpipes <number>
566 Sets the maximum per-process number of pipes to <number>. Currently, pipes
567 are only used by kernel-based tcp splicing. Since a pipe contains two file
568 descriptors, the "ulimit-n" value will be increased accordingly. The default
569 value is maxconn/4, which seems to be more than enough for most heavy usages.
570 The splice code dynamically allocates and releases pipes, and can fall back
571 to standard copy, so setting this value too low may only impact performance.
572
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200573noepoll
574 Disables the use of the "epoll" event polling system on Linux. It is
575 equivalent to the command-line argument "-de". The next polling system
576 used will generally be "poll". See also "nosepoll", and "nopoll".
577
578nokqueue
579 Disables the use of the "kqueue" event polling system on BSD. It is
580 equivalent to the command-line argument "-dk". The next polling system
581 used will generally be "poll". See also "nopoll".
582
583nopoll
584 Disables the use of the "poll" event polling system. It is equivalent to the
585 command-line argument "-dp". The next polling system used will be "select".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100586 It should never be needed to disable "poll" since it's available on all
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200587 platforms supported by HAProxy. See also "nosepoll", and "nopoll" and
588 "nokqueue".
589
590nosepoll
591 Disables the use of the "speculative epoll" event polling system on Linux. It
592 is equivalent to the command-line argument "-ds". The next polling system
593 used will generally be "epoll". See also "nosepoll", and "nopoll".
594
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100595nosplice
596 Disables the use of kernel tcp splicing between sockets on Linux. It is
597 equivalent to the command line argument "-dS". Data will then be copied
598 using conventional and more portable recv/send calls. Kernel tcp splicing is
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100599 limited to some very recent instances of kernel 2.6. Most versions between
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100600 2.6.25 and 2.6.28 are buggy and will forward corrupted data, so they must not
601 be used. This option makes it easier to globally disable kernel splicing in
602 case of doubt. See also "option splice-auto", "option splice-request" and
603 "option splice-response".
604
Willy Tarreaufe255b72007-10-14 23:09:26 +0200605spread-checks <0..50, in percent>
606 Sometimes it is desirable to avoid sending health checks to servers at exact
607 intervals, for instance when many logical servers are located on the same
608 physical server. With the help of this parameter, it becomes possible to add
609 some randomness in the check interval between 0 and +/- 50%. A value between
610 2 and 5 seems to show good results. The default value remains at 0.
611
Willy Tarreau27a674e2009-08-17 07:23:33 +0200612tune.bufsize <number>
613 Sets the buffer size to this size (in bytes). Lower values allow more
614 sessions to coexist in the same amount of RAM, and higher values allow some
615 applications with very large cookies to work. The default value is 16384 and
616 can be changed at build time. It is strongly recommended not to change this
617 from the default value, as very low values will break some services such as
618 statistics, and values larger than default size will increase memory usage,
619 possibly causing the system to run out of memory. At least the global maxconn
620 parameter should be decreased by the same factor as this one is increased.
621
Willy Tarreaua0250ba2008-01-06 11:22:57 +0100622tune.maxaccept <number>
623 Sets the maximum number of consecutive accepts that a process may perform on
624 a single wake up. High values give higher priority to high connection rates,
625 while lower values give higher priority to already established connections.
Willy Tarreauf49d1df2009-03-01 08:35:41 +0100626 This value is limited to 100 by default in single process mode. However, in
Willy Tarreaua0250ba2008-01-06 11:22:57 +0100627 multi-process mode (nbproc > 1), it defaults to 8 so that when one process
628 wakes up, it does not take all incoming connections for itself and leaves a
Willy Tarreauf49d1df2009-03-01 08:35:41 +0100629 part of them to other processes. Setting this value to -1 completely disables
Willy Tarreaua0250ba2008-01-06 11:22:57 +0100630 the limitation. It should normally not be needed to tweak this value.
631
632tune.maxpollevents <number>
633 Sets the maximum amount of events that can be processed at once in a call to
634 the polling system. The default value is adapted to the operating system. It
635 has been noticed that reducing it below 200 tends to slightly decrease
636 latency at the expense of network bandwidth, and increasing it above 200
637 tends to trade latency for slightly increased bandwidth.
638
Willy Tarreau27a674e2009-08-17 07:23:33 +0200639tune.maxrewrite <number>
640 Sets the reserved buffer space to this size in bytes. The reserved space is
641 used for header rewriting or appending. The first reads on sockets will never
642 fill more than bufsize-maxrewrite. Historically it has defaulted to half of
643 bufsize, though that does not make much sense since there are rarely large
644 numbers of headers to add. Setting it too high prevents processing of large
645 requests or responses. Setting it too low prevents addition of new headers
646 to already large requests or to POST requests. It is generally wise to set it
647 to about 1024. It is automatically readjusted to half of bufsize if it is
648 larger than that. This means you don't have to worry about it when changing
649 bufsize.
650
Willy Tarreaue803de22010-01-21 17:43:04 +0100651tune.rcvbuf.client <number>
652tune.rcvbuf.server <number>
653 Forces the kernel socket receive buffer size on the client or the server side
654 to the specified value in bytes. This value applies to all TCP/HTTP frontends
655 and backends. It should normally never be set, and the default size (0) lets
656 the kernel autotune this value depending on the amount of available memory.
657 However it can sometimes help to set it to very low values (eg: 4096) in
658 order to save kernel memory by preventing it from buffering too large amounts
659 of received data. Lower values will significantly increase CPU usage though.
660
661tune.sndbuf.client <number>
662tune.sndbuf.server <number>
663 Forces the kernel socket send buffer size on the client or the server side to
664 the specified value in bytes. This value applies to all TCP/HTTP frontends
665 and backends. It should normally never be set, and the default size (0) lets
666 the kernel autotune this value depending on the amount of available memory.
667 However it can sometimes help to set it to very low values (eg: 4096) in
668 order to save kernel memory by preventing it from buffering too large amounts
669 of received data. Lower values will significantly increase CPU usage though.
670 Another use case is to prevent write timeouts with extremely slow clients due
671 to the kernel waiting for a large part of the buffer to be read before
672 notifying haproxy again.
673
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200674
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006753.3. Debugging
676--------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200677
678debug
679 Enables debug mode which dumps to stdout all exchanges, and disables forking
680 into background. It is the equivalent of the command-line argument "-d". It
681 should never be used in a production configuration since it may prevent full
682 system startup.
683
684quiet
685 Do not display any message during startup. It is equivalent to the command-
686 line argument "-q".
687
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01006883.4. Userlists
689--------------
690It is possible to control access to frontend/backend/listen sections or to
691http stats by allowing only authenticated and authorized users. To do this,
692it is required to create at least one userlist and to define users.
693
694userlist <listname>
695 Creates new userlist with name <listname>. Many indepenend userlists can be
696 used to store authentication & authorization data for independent customers.
697
698group <groupname> [users <user>,<user>,(...)]
699 Adds group <gropname> to the current userlist. It is also possible to
700 attach users to this group by using a comma separated list of names
701 proceeded by "users" keyword.
702
703user <username> [password|insecure-password <password>] [groups <group>,<group>,(...)]
704 Adds user <username> to the current userlist. Both secure (encrypted) and
705 insecure (unencrypted) passwords can be used. Encrypted passwords are
706 evaluated using the crypt(3) function so dependig of the system's
707 capabilities, different algoritms are supported. For example modern Glibc
708 based Linux system supports MD5, SHA-256, SHA-512 and of course classic,
709 DES-based method of crypting passwords.
710
711
712 Example:
713 userlist L1
714 group G1 users tiger,scott
715 group G2 users xdb,scott
716
717 user tiger password $6$k6y3o.eP$JlKBx9za966ud67qe45NSQYf8Nw.XFuk8QVRevoLh1XPCQDCBPjcU2JtGBSS0MOQW2PFxHSwRv6J.C0/D7cV91
718 user scott insecure-password elgato
719 user xdb insecure-password hello
720
721 userlist L2
722 group G1
723 group G2
724
725 user tiger password $6$k6y3o.eP$JlKBx9za966ud67qe45NSQYf8Nw.XFuk8QVRevoLh1XPCQDCBPjcU2JtGBSS0MOQW2PFxHSwRv6J.C0/D7cV91 groups G1
726 user scott insecure-password elgato groups G1,G2
727 user xdb insecure-password hello groups G2
728
729 Please note that both lists are functionally identical.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200730
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007314. Proxies
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200732----------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100733
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200734Proxy configuration can be located in a set of sections :
735 - defaults <name>
736 - frontend <name>
737 - backend <name>
738 - listen <name>
739
740A "defaults" section sets default parameters for all other sections following
741its declaration. Those default parameters are reset by the next "defaults"
742section. See below for the list of parameters which can be set in a "defaults"
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100743section. The name is optional but its use is encouraged for better readability.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200744
745A "frontend" section describes a set of listening sockets accepting client
746connections.
747
748A "backend" section describes a set of servers to which the proxy will connect
749to forward incoming connections.
750
751A "listen" section defines a complete proxy with its frontend and backend
752parts combined in one section. It is generally useful for TCP-only traffic.
753
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100754All proxy names must be formed from upper and lower case letters, digits,
755'-' (dash), '_' (underscore) , '.' (dot) and ':' (colon). ACL names are
756case-sensitive, which means that "www" and "WWW" are two different proxies.
757
758Historically, all proxy names could overlap, it just caused troubles in the
759logs. Since the introduction of content switching, it is mandatory that two
760proxies with overlapping capabilities (frontend/backend) have different names.
761However, it is still permitted that a frontend and a backend share the same
762name, as this configuration seems to be commonly encountered.
763
764Right now, two major proxy modes are supported : "tcp", also known as layer 4,
765and "http", also known as layer 7. In layer 4 mode, HAProxy simply forwards
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100766bidirectional traffic between two sides. In layer 7 mode, HAProxy analyzes the
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100767protocol, and can interact with it by allowing, blocking, switching, adding,
768modifying, or removing arbitrary contents in requests or responses, based on
769arbitrary criteria.
770
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100771
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007724.1. Proxy keywords matrix
773--------------------------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100774
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200775The following list of keywords is supported. Most of them may only be used in a
776limited set of section types. Some of them are marked as "deprecated" because
777they are inherited from an old syntax which may be confusing or functionally
778limited, and there are new recommended keywords to replace them. Keywords
Willy Tarreau3842f002009-06-14 11:39:52 +0200779listed with [no] can be optionally inverted using the "no" prefix, eg. "no
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200780option contstats". This makes sense when the option has been enabled by default
Willy Tarreau3842f002009-06-14 11:39:52 +0200781and must be disabled for a specific instance. Such options may also be prefixed
782with "default" in order to restore default settings regardless of what has been
783specified in a previous "defaults" section.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100784
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200785
786keyword defaults frontend listen backend
787----------------------+----------+----------+---------+---------
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100788acl - X X X
789appsession - - X X
Willy Tarreauc73ce2b2008-01-06 10:55:10 +0100790backlog X X X -
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100791balance X - X X
792bind - X X -
793bind-process X X X X
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200794block - X X X
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100795capture cookie - X X -
796capture request header - X X -
797capture response header - X X -
Willy Tarreaue219db72007-12-03 01:30:13 +0100798clitimeout X X X - (deprecated)
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100799contimeout X - X X (deprecated)
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200800cookie X - X X
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +0100801default-server X - X X
Cyril Bonté99ed3272010-01-24 23:29:44 +0100802default_backend X X X -
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +0200803description - X X X
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100804disabled X X X X
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200805dispatch - - X X
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100806enabled X X X X
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200807errorfile X X X X
808errorloc X X X X
809errorloc302 X X X X
810errorloc303 X X X X
811fullconn X - X X
Cyril Bonté99ed3272010-01-24 23:29:44 +0100812grace X X X X
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +0200813hash-type X - X X
Willy Tarreaudbc36f62007-11-30 12:29:11 +0100814http-check disable-on-404 X - X X
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100815http-request - X X X
Willy Tarreau53fb4ae2009-10-04 23:04:08 +0200816id - X X X
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200817log X X X X
818maxconn X X X -
819mode X X X X
Willy Tarreauc7246fc2007-12-02 17:31:20 +0100820monitor fail - X X -
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200821monitor-net X X X -
822monitor-uri X X X -
Krzysztof Oledzki336d4752007-12-25 02:40:22 +0100823[no] option abortonclose X - X X
Willy Tarreau4076a152009-04-02 15:18:36 +0200824[no] option accept-invalid-
825 http-request X X X -
826[no] option accept-invalid-
827 http-response X - X X
Krzysztof Oledzki336d4752007-12-25 02:40:22 +0100828[no] option allbackups X - X X
829[no] option checkcache X - X X
830[no] option clitcpka X X X -
831[no] option contstats X X X -
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +0200832[no] option dontlog-normal X X X -
Krzysztof Oledzki336d4752007-12-25 02:40:22 +0100833[no] option dontlognull X X X -
Willy Tarreaua31e5df2009-12-30 01:10:35 +0100834[no] option forceclose X X X X
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200835option forwardfor X X X X
836option httpchk X - X X
Willy Tarreaub608feb2010-01-02 22:47:18 +0100837[no] option http-server-
838 close X X X X
Willy Tarreau88d349d2010-01-25 12:15:43 +0100839[no] option http-use-proxy-
840 header X X X -
Krzysztof Oledzki336d4752007-12-25 02:40:22 +0100841[no] option httpclose X X X X
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200842option httplog X X X X
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +0200843[no] option http_proxy X X X X
Willy Tarreauf27b5ea2009-10-03 22:01:18 +0200844[no] option independant-
845 streams X X X X
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki213014e2009-09-27 15:50:02 +0200846[no] option log-health- X - X X
847 checks
Willy Tarreau211ad242009-10-03 21:45:07 +0200848[no] option log-separate-
849 errors X X X -
Krzysztof Oledzki336d4752007-12-25 02:40:22 +0100850[no] option logasap X X X -
Hervé COMMOWICK698ae002010-01-12 09:25:13 +0100851option mysql-check X - X X
Krzysztof Oledzki336d4752007-12-25 02:40:22 +0100852[no] option nolinger X X X X
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +0200853option originalto X X X X
Krzysztof Oledzki336d4752007-12-25 02:40:22 +0100854[no] option persist X - X X
855[no] option redispatch X - X X
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200856option smtpchk X - X X
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiaeebf9b2009-10-04 15:43:17 +0200857[no] option socket-stats X X X -
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100858[no] option splice-auto X X X X
859[no] option splice-request X X X X
860[no] option splice-response X X X X
Krzysztof Oledzki336d4752007-12-25 02:40:22 +0100861[no] option srvtcpka X - X X
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200862option ssl-hello-chk X - X X
Willy Tarreau9ea05a72009-06-14 12:07:01 +0200863[no] option tcp-smart-
864 accept X X X -
Willy Tarreau39bb9be2009-10-17 16:04:09 +0200865[no] option tcp-smart-
866 connect X - X X
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200867option tcpka X X X X
868option tcplog X X X X
Willy Tarreau4b1f8592008-12-23 23:13:55 +0100869[no] option transparent X - X X
Emeric Brun647caf12009-06-30 17:57:00 +0200870persist rdp-cookie X - X X
Willy Tarreau3a7d2072009-03-05 23:48:25 +0100871rate-limit sessions X X X -
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +0200872redirect - X X X
Krzysztof Oledzki336d4752007-12-25 02:40:22 +0100873redisp X - X X (deprecated)
874redispatch X - X X (deprecated)
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200875reqadd - X X X
876reqallow - X X X
877reqdel - X X X
878reqdeny - X X X
879reqiallow - X X X
880reqidel - X X X
881reqideny - X X X
882reqipass - X X X
883reqirep - X X X
884reqisetbe - X X X
885reqitarpit - X X X
886reqpass - X X X
887reqrep - X X X
888reqsetbe - X X X
889reqtarpit - X X X
890retries X - X X
891rspadd - X X X
892rspdel - X X X
893rspdeny - X X X
894rspidel - X X X
895rspideny - X X X
896rspirep - X X X
897rsprep - X X X
898server - - X X
899source X - X X
Willy Tarreaue219db72007-12-03 01:30:13 +0100900srvtimeout X - X X (deprecated)
Willy Tarreau24e779b2007-07-24 23:43:37 +0200901stats auth X - X X
902stats enable X - X X
903stats realm X - X X
Willy Tarreaubbd42122007-07-25 07:26:38 +0200904stats refresh X - X X
Willy Tarreau24e779b2007-07-24 23:43:37 +0200905stats scope X - X X
906stats uri X - X X
Krzysztof Oledzkid9db9272007-10-15 10:05:11 +0200907stats hide-version X - X X
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +0200908tcp-request content accept - X X -
909tcp-request content reject - X X -
910tcp-request inspect-delay - X X -
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +0100911timeout check X - X X
Willy Tarreaue219db72007-12-03 01:30:13 +0100912timeout client X X X -
913timeout clitimeout X X X - (deprecated)
914timeout connect X - X X
915timeout contimeout X - X X (deprecated)
Willy Tarreaub16a5742010-01-10 14:46:16 +0100916timeout http-keep-alive X X X X
Willy Tarreaucd7afc02009-07-12 10:03:17 +0200917timeout http-request X X X X
Willy Tarreaue219db72007-12-03 01:30:13 +0100918timeout queue X - X X
919timeout server X - X X
920timeout srvtimeout X - X X (deprecated)
Willy Tarreau51c9bde2008-01-06 13:40:03 +0100921timeout tarpit X X X X
Willy Tarreau4b1f8592008-12-23 23:13:55 +0100922transparent X - X X (deprecated)
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200923use_backend - X X -
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200924----------------------+----------+----------+---------+---------
925keyword defaults frontend listen backend
926
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100927
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02009284.2. Alphabetically sorted keywords reference
929---------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100930
931This section provides a description of each keyword and its usage.
932
933
934acl <aclname> <criterion> [flags] [operator] <value> ...
935 Declare or complete an access list.
936 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
937 no | yes | yes | yes
938 Example:
939 acl invalid_src src 0.0.0.0/7 224.0.0.0/3
940 acl invalid_src src_port 0:1023
941 acl local_dst hdr(host) -i localhost
942
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200943 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100944
945
Cyril Bontéb21570a2009-11-29 20:04:48 +0100946appsession <cookie> len <length> timeout <holdtime>
947 [request-learn] [prefix] [mode <path-parameters|query-string>]
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100948 Define session stickiness on an existing application cookie.
949 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
950 no | no | yes | yes
951 Arguments :
952 <cookie> this is the name of the cookie used by the application and which
953 HAProxy will have to learn for each new session.
954
Cyril Bontéb21570a2009-11-29 20:04:48 +0100955 <length> this is the max number of characters that will be memorized and
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100956 checked in each cookie value.
957
958 <holdtime> this is the time after which the cookie will be removed from
959 memory if unused. If no unit is specified, this time is in
960 milliseconds.
961
Cyril Bontébf47aeb2009-10-15 00:15:40 +0200962 request-learn
963 If this option is specified, then haproxy will be able to learn
964 the cookie found in the request in case the server does not
965 specify any in response. This is typically what happens with
966 PHPSESSID cookies, or when haproxy's session expires before
967 the application's session and the correct server is selected.
968 It is recommended to specify this option to improve reliability.
969
Cyril Bontéb21570a2009-11-29 20:04:48 +0100970 prefix When this option is specified, haproxy will match on the cookie
971 prefix (or URL parameter prefix). The appsession value is the
972 data following this prefix.
973
974 Example :
975 appsession ASPSESSIONID len 64 timeout 3h prefix
976
977 This will match the cookie ASPSESSIONIDXXXX=XXXXX,
978 the appsession value will be XXXX=XXXXX.
979
980 mode This option allows to change the URL parser mode.
981 2 modes are currently supported :
982 - path-parameters :
983 The parser looks for the appsession in the path parameters
984 part (each parameter is separated by a semi-colon), which is
985 convenient for JSESSIONID for example.
986 This is the default mode if the option is not set.
987 - query-string :
988 In this mode, the parser will look for the appsession in the
989 query string.
990
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100991 When an application cookie is defined in a backend, HAProxy will check when
992 the server sets such a cookie, and will store its value in a table, and
993 associate it with the server's identifier. Up to <length> characters from
994 the value will be retained. On each connection, haproxy will look for this
Cyril Bontéb21570a2009-11-29 20:04:48 +0100995 cookie both in the "Cookie:" headers, and as a URL parameter (depending on
996 the mode used). If a known value is found, the client will be directed to the
997 server associated with this value. Otherwise, the load balancing algorithm is
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100998 applied. Cookies are automatically removed from memory when they have been
999 unused for a duration longer than <holdtime>.
1000
1001 The definition of an application cookie is limited to one per backend.
1002
1003 Example :
1004 appsession JSESSIONID len 52 timeout 3h
1005
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +01001006 See also : "cookie", "capture cookie", "balance", "stick" and "stick-table".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001007
1008
Willy Tarreauc73ce2b2008-01-06 10:55:10 +01001009backlog <conns>
1010 Give hints to the system about the approximate listen backlog desired size
1011 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1012 yes | yes | yes | no
1013 Arguments :
1014 <conns> is the number of pending connections. Depending on the operating
1015 system, it may represent the number of already acknowledged
1016 connections, of non-acknowledged ones, or both.
1017
1018 In order to protect against SYN flood attacks, one solution is to increase
1019 the system's SYN backlog size. Depending on the system, sometimes it is just
1020 tunable via a system parameter, sometimes it is not adjustable at all, and
1021 sometimes the system relies on hints given by the application at the time of
1022 the listen() syscall. By default, HAProxy passes the frontend's maxconn value
1023 to the listen() syscall. On systems which can make use of this value, it can
1024 sometimes be useful to be able to specify a different value, hence this
1025 backlog parameter.
1026
1027 On Linux 2.4, the parameter is ignored by the system. On Linux 2.6, it is
1028 used as a hint and the system accepts up to the smallest greater power of
1029 two, and never more than some limits (usually 32768).
1030
1031 See also : "maxconn" and the target operating system's tuning guide.
1032
1033
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001034balance <algorithm> [ <arguments> ]
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001035balance url_param <param> [check_post [<max_wait>]]
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001036 Define the load balancing algorithm to be used in a backend.
1037 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1038 yes | no | yes | yes
1039 Arguments :
1040 <algorithm> is the algorithm used to select a server when doing load
1041 balancing. This only applies when no persistence information
1042 is available, or when a connection is redispatched to another
1043 server. <algorithm> may be one of the following :
1044
1045 roundrobin Each server is used in turns, according to their weights.
1046 This is the smoothest and fairest algorithm when the server's
1047 processing time remains equally distributed. This algorithm
1048 is dynamic, which means that server weights may be adjusted
Willy Tarreau9757a382009-10-03 12:56:50 +02001049 on the fly for slow starts for instance. It is limited by
1050 design to 4128 active servers per backend. Note that in some
1051 large farms, when a server becomes up after having been down
1052 for a very short time, it may sometimes take a few hundreds
1053 requests for it to be re-integrated into the farm and start
1054 receiving traffic. This is normal, though very rare. It is
1055 indicated here in case you would have the chance to observe
1056 it, so that you don't worry.
1057
1058 static-rr Each server is used in turns, according to their weights.
1059 This algorithm is as similar to roundrobin except that it is
1060 static, which means that changing a server's weight on the
1061 fly will have no effect. On the other hand, it has no design
1062 limitation on the number of servers, and when a server goes
1063 up, it is always immediately reintroduced into the farm, once
1064 the full map is recomputed. It also uses slightly less CPU to
1065 run (around -1%).
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001066
Willy Tarreau2d2a7f82008-03-17 12:07:56 +01001067 leastconn The server with the lowest number of connections receives the
1068 connection. Round-robin is performed within groups of servers
1069 of the same load to ensure that all servers will be used. Use
1070 of this algorithm is recommended where very long sessions are
1071 expected, such as LDAP, SQL, TSE, etc... but is not very well
1072 suited for protocols using short sessions such as HTTP. This
1073 algorithm is dynamic, which means that server weights may be
1074 adjusted on the fly for slow starts for instance.
1075
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001076 source The source IP address is hashed and divided by the total
1077 weight of the running servers to designate which server will
1078 receive the request. This ensures that the same client IP
1079 address will always reach the same server as long as no
1080 server goes down or up. If the hash result changes due to the
1081 number of running servers changing, many clients will be
1082 directed to a different server. This algorithm is generally
1083 used in TCP mode where no cookie may be inserted. It may also
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001084 be used on the Internet to provide a best-effort stickiness
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001085 to clients which refuse session cookies. This algorithm is
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001086 static by default, which means that changing a server's
1087 weight on the fly will have no effect, but this can be
1088 changed using "hash-type".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001089
1090 uri The left part of the URI (before the question mark) is hashed
1091 and divided by the total weight of the running servers. The
1092 result designates which server will receive the request. This
1093 ensures that a same URI will always be directed to the same
1094 server as long as no server goes up or down. This is used
1095 with proxy caches and anti-virus proxies in order to maximize
1096 the cache hit rate. Note that this algorithm may only be used
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001097 in an HTTP backend. This algorithm is static by default,
1098 which means that changing a server's weight on the fly will
1099 have no effect, but this can be changed using "hash-type".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001100
Marek Majkowski9c30fc12008-04-27 23:25:55 +02001101 This algorithm support two optional parameters "len" and
1102 "depth", both followed by a positive integer number. These
1103 options may be helpful when it is needed to balance servers
1104 based on the beginning of the URI only. The "len" parameter
1105 indicates that the algorithm should only consider that many
1106 characters at the beginning of the URI to compute the hash.
1107 Note that having "len" set to 1 rarely makes sense since most
1108 URIs start with a leading "/".
1109
1110 The "depth" parameter indicates the maximum directory depth
1111 to be used to compute the hash. One level is counted for each
1112 slash in the request. If both parameters are specified, the
1113 evaluation stops when either is reached.
1114
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001115 url_param The URL parameter specified in argument will be looked up in
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001116 the query string of each HTTP GET request.
1117
1118 If the modifier "check_post" is used, then an HTTP POST
1119 request entity will be searched for the parameter argument,
1120 when the question mark indicating a query string ('?') is not
1121 present in the URL. Optionally, specify a number of octets to
1122 wait for before attempting to search the message body. If the
1123 entity can not be searched, then round robin is used for each
1124 request. For instance, if your clients always send the LB
1125 parameter in the first 128 bytes, then specify that. The
1126 default is 48. The entity data will not be scanned until the
1127 required number of octets have arrived at the gateway, this
1128 is the minimum of: (default/max_wait, Content-Length or first
1129 chunk length). If Content-Length is missing or zero, it does
1130 not need to wait for more data than the client promised to
1131 send. When Content-Length is present and larger than
1132 <max_wait>, then waiting is limited to <max_wait> and it is
1133 assumed that this will be enough data to search for the
1134 presence of the parameter. In the unlikely event that
1135 Transfer-Encoding: chunked is used, only the first chunk is
1136 scanned. Parameter values separated by a chunk boundary, may
1137 be randomly balanced if at all.
1138
1139 If the parameter is found followed by an equal sign ('=') and
1140 a value, then the value is hashed and divided by the total
1141 weight of the running servers. The result designates which
1142 server will receive the request.
1143
1144 This is used to track user identifiers in requests and ensure
1145 that a same user ID will always be sent to the same server as
1146 long as no server goes up or down. If no value is found or if
1147 the parameter is not found, then a round robin algorithm is
1148 applied. Note that this algorithm may only be used in an HTTP
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001149 backend. This algorithm is static by default, which means
1150 that changing a server's weight on the fly will have no
1151 effect, but this can be changed using "hash-type".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001152
Benoitaffb4812009-03-25 13:02:10 +01001153 hdr(name) The HTTP header <name> will be looked up in each HTTP request.
1154 Just as with the equivalent ACL 'hdr()' function, the header
1155 name in parenthesis is not case sensitive. If the header is
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001156 absent or if it does not contain any value, the roundrobin
Benoitaffb4812009-03-25 13:02:10 +01001157 algorithm is applied instead.
1158
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001159 An optional 'use_domain_only' parameter is available, for
Benoitaffb4812009-03-25 13:02:10 +01001160 reducing the hash algorithm to the main domain part with some
1161 specific headers such as 'Host'. For instance, in the Host
1162 value "haproxy.1wt.eu", only "1wt" will be considered.
1163
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001164 This algorithm is static by default, which means that
1165 changing a server's weight on the fly will have no effect,
1166 but this can be changed using "hash-type".
1167
Emeric Brun736aa232009-06-30 17:56:00 +02001168 rdp-cookie
1169 rdp-cookie(name)
1170 The RDP cookie <name> (or "mstshash" if omitted) will be
1171 looked up and hashed for each incoming TCP request. Just as
1172 with the equivalent ACL 'req_rdp_cookie()' function, the name
1173 is not case-sensitive. This mechanism is useful as a degraded
1174 persistence mode, as it makes it possible to always send the
1175 same user (or the same session ID) to the same server. If the
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001176 cookie is not found, the normal roundrobin algorithm is
Emeric Brun736aa232009-06-30 17:56:00 +02001177 used instead.
1178
1179 Note that for this to work, the frontend must ensure that an
1180 RDP cookie is already present in the request buffer. For this
1181 you must use 'tcp-request content accept' rule combined with
1182 a 'req_rdp_cookie_cnt' ACL.
1183
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001184 This algorithm is static by default, which means that
1185 changing a server's weight on the fly will have no effect,
1186 but this can be changed using "hash-type".
1187
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001188 <arguments> is an optional list of arguments which may be needed by some
Marek Majkowski9c30fc12008-04-27 23:25:55 +02001189 algorithms. Right now, only "url_param" and "uri" support an
1190 optional argument.
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001191
Marek Majkowski9c30fc12008-04-27 23:25:55 +02001192 balance uri [len <len>] [depth <depth>]
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001193 balance url_param <param> [check_post [<max_wait>]]
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001194
Willy Tarreau3cd9af22009-03-15 14:06:41 +01001195 The load balancing algorithm of a backend is set to roundrobin when no other
1196 algorithm, mode nor option have been set. The algorithm may only be set once
1197 for each backend.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001198
1199 Examples :
1200 balance roundrobin
1201 balance url_param userid
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001202 balance url_param session_id check_post 64
Benoitaffb4812009-03-25 13:02:10 +01001203 balance hdr(User-Agent)
1204 balance hdr(host)
1205 balance hdr(Host) use_domain_only
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001206
1207 Note: the following caveats and limitations on using the "check_post"
1208 extension with "url_param" must be considered :
1209
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001210 - all POST requests are eligible for consideration, because there is no way
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001211 to determine if the parameters will be found in the body or entity which
1212 may contain binary data. Therefore another method may be required to
1213 restrict consideration of POST requests that have no URL parameters in
1214 the body. (see acl reqideny http_end)
1215
1216 - using a <max_wait> value larger than the request buffer size does not
1217 make sense and is useless. The buffer size is set at build time, and
1218 defaults to 16 kB.
1219
1220 - Content-Encoding is not supported, the parameter search will probably
1221 fail; and load balancing will fall back to Round Robin.
1222
1223 - Expect: 100-continue is not supported, load balancing will fall back to
1224 Round Robin.
1225
1226 - Transfer-Encoding (RFC2616 3.6.1) is only supported in the first chunk.
1227 If the entire parameter value is not present in the first chunk, the
1228 selection of server is undefined (actually, defined by how little
1229 actually appeared in the first chunk).
1230
1231 - This feature does not support generation of a 100, 411 or 501 response.
1232
1233 - In some cases, requesting "check_post" MAY attempt to scan the entire
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001234 contents of a message body. Scanning normally terminates when linear
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001235 white space or control characters are found, indicating the end of what
1236 might be a URL parameter list. This is probably not a concern with SGML
1237 type message bodies.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001238
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001239 See also : "dispatch", "cookie", "appsession", "transparent", "hash-type" and
1240 "http_proxy".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001241
1242
1243bind [<address>]:<port> [, ...]
Willy Tarreau5e6e2042009-02-04 17:19:29 +01001244bind [<address>]:<port> [, ...] interface <interface>
Willy Tarreaube1b9182009-06-14 18:48:19 +02001245bind [<address>]:<port> [, ...] mss <maxseg>
Willy Tarreaub1e52e82008-01-13 14:49:51 +01001246bind [<address>]:<port> [, ...] transparent
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiaeebf9b2009-10-04 15:43:17 +02001247bind [<address>]:<port> [, ...] id <id>
1248bind [<address>]:<port> [, ...] name <name>
Willy Tarreau53319c92009-11-28 08:21:29 +01001249bind [<address>]:<port> [, ...] defer-accept
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001250 Define one or several listening addresses and/or ports in a frontend.
1251 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1252 no | yes | yes | no
1253 Arguments :
Willy Tarreaub1e52e82008-01-13 14:49:51 +01001254 <address> is optional and can be a host name, an IPv4 address, an IPv6
1255 address, or '*'. It designates the address the frontend will
1256 listen on. If unset, all IPv4 addresses of the system will be
1257 listened on. The same will apply for '*' or the system's
1258 special address "0.0.0.0".
1259
1260 <port> is the TCP port number the proxy will listen on. The port is
1261 mandatory. Note that in the case of an IPv6 address, the port
1262 is always the number after the last colon (':').
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001263
Willy Tarreau5e6e2042009-02-04 17:19:29 +01001264 <interface> is an optional physical interface name. This is currently
1265 only supported on Linux. The interface must be a physical
1266 interface, not an aliased interface. When specified, all
1267 addresses on the same line will only be accepted if the
1268 incoming packet physically come through the designated
1269 interface. It is also possible to bind multiple frontends to
1270 the same address if they are bound to different interfaces.
1271 Note that binding to a physical interface requires root
1272 privileges.
1273
Willy Tarreaube1b9182009-06-14 18:48:19 +02001274 <maxseg> is an optional TCP Maximum Segment Size (MSS) value to be
1275 advertised on incoming connections. This can be used to force
1276 a lower MSS for certain specific ports, for instance for
1277 connections passing through a VPN. Note that this relies on a
1278 kernel feature which is theorically supported under Linux but
1279 was buggy in all versions prior to 2.6.28. It may or may not
1280 work on other operating systems. The commonly advertised
1281 value on Ethernet networks is 1460 = 1500(MTU) - 40(IP+TCP).
1282
Willy Tarreau53fb4ae2009-10-04 23:04:08 +02001283 <id> is a persistent value for socket ID. Must be positive and
1284 unique in the proxy. An unused value will automatically be
1285 assigned if unset. Can only be used when defining only a
1286 single socket.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiaeebf9b2009-10-04 15:43:17 +02001287
1288 <name> is an optional name provided for stats
1289
Willy Tarreaub1e52e82008-01-13 14:49:51 +01001290 transparent is an optional keyword which is supported only on certain
1291 Linux kernels. It indicates that the addresses will be bound
1292 even if they do not belong to the local machine. Any packet
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001293 targeting any of these addresses will be caught just as if
Willy Tarreaub1e52e82008-01-13 14:49:51 +01001294 the address was locally configured. This normally requires
1295 that IP forwarding is enabled. Caution! do not use this with
1296 the default address '*', as it would redirect any traffic for
1297 the specified port. This keyword is available only when
1298 HAProxy is built with USE_LINUX_TPROXY=1.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001299
Willy Tarreaucb6cd432009-10-13 07:34:14 +02001300 defer_accept is an optional keyword which is supported only on certain
1301 Linux kernels. It states that a connection will only be
1302 accepted once some data arrive on it, or at worst after the
1303 first retransmit. This should be used only on protocols for
1304 which the client talks first (eg: HTTP). It can slightly
1305 improve performance by ensuring that most of the request is
1306 already available when the connection is accepted. On the
1307 other hand, it will not be able to detect connections which
1308 don't talk. It is important to note that this option is
1309 broken in all kernels up to 2.6.31, as the connection is
1310 never accepted until the client talks. This can cause issues
1311 with front firewalls which would see an established
1312 connection while the proxy will only see it in SYN_RECV.
1313
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001314 It is possible to specify a list of address:port combinations delimited by
1315 commas. The frontend will then listen on all of these addresses. There is no
1316 fixed limit to the number of addresses and ports which can be listened on in
1317 a frontend, as well as there is no limit to the number of "bind" statements
1318 in a frontend.
1319
1320 Example :
1321 listen http_proxy
1322 bind :80,:443
1323 bind 10.0.0.1:10080,10.0.0.1:10443
1324
1325 See also : "source".
1326
1327
Willy Tarreau0b9c02c2009-02-04 22:05:05 +01001328bind-process [ all | odd | even | <number 1-32> ] ...
1329 Limit visibility of an instance to a certain set of processes numbers.
1330 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1331 yes | yes | yes | yes
1332 Arguments :
1333 all All process will see this instance. This is the default. It
1334 may be used to override a default value.
1335
1336 odd This instance will be enabled on processes 1,3,5,...31. This
1337 option may be combined with other numbers.
1338
1339 even This instance will be enabled on processes 2,4,6,...32. This
1340 option may be combined with other numbers. Do not use it
1341 with less than 2 processes otherwise some instances might be
1342 missing from all processes.
1343
1344 number The instance will be enabled on this process number, between
1345 1 and 32. You must be careful not to reference a process
1346 number greater than the configured global.nbproc, otherwise
1347 some instances might be missing from all processes.
1348
1349 This keyword limits binding of certain instances to certain processes. This
1350 is useful in order not to have too many processes listening to the same
1351 ports. For instance, on a dual-core machine, it might make sense to set
1352 'nbproc 2' in the global section, then distributes the listeners among 'odd'
1353 and 'even' instances.
1354
1355 At the moment, it is not possible to reference more than 32 processes using
1356 this keyword, but this should be more than enough for most setups. Please
1357 note that 'all' really means all processes and is not limited to the first
1358 32.
1359
1360 If some backends are referenced by frontends bound to other processes, the
1361 backend automatically inherits the frontend's processes.
1362
1363 Example :
1364 listen app_ip1
1365 bind 10.0.0.1:80
1366 bind_process odd
1367
1368 listen app_ip2
1369 bind 10.0.0.2:80
1370 bind_process even
1371
1372 listen management
1373 bind 10.0.0.3:80
1374 bind_process 1 2 3 4
1375
1376 See also : "nbproc" in global section.
1377
1378
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001379block { if | unless } <condition>
1380 Block a layer 7 request if/unless a condition is matched
1381 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1382 no | yes | yes | yes
1383
1384 The HTTP request will be blocked very early in the layer 7 processing
1385 if/unless <condition> is matched. A 403 error will be returned if the request
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001386 is blocked. The condition has to reference ACLs (see section 7). This is
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001387 typically used to deny access to certain sensible resources if some
1388 conditions are met or not met. There is no fixed limit to the number of
1389 "block" statements per instance.
1390
1391 Example:
1392 acl invalid_src src 0.0.0.0/7 224.0.0.0/3
1393 acl invalid_src src_port 0:1023
1394 acl local_dst hdr(host) -i localhost
1395 block if invalid_src || local_dst
1396
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001397 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001398
1399
1400capture cookie <name> len <length>
1401 Capture and log a cookie in the request and in the response.
1402 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1403 no | yes | yes | no
1404 Arguments :
1405 <name> is the beginning of the name of the cookie to capture. In order
1406 to match the exact name, simply suffix the name with an equal
1407 sign ('='). The full name will appear in the logs, which is
1408 useful with application servers which adjust both the cookie name
1409 and value (eg: ASPSESSIONXXXXX).
1410
1411 <length> is the maximum number of characters to report in the logs, which
1412 include the cookie name, the equal sign and the value, all in the
1413 standard "name=value" form. The string will be truncated on the
1414 right if it exceeds <length>.
1415
1416 Only the first cookie is captured. Both the "cookie" request headers and the
1417 "set-cookie" response headers are monitored. This is particularly useful to
1418 check for application bugs causing session crossing or stealing between
1419 users, because generally the user's cookies can only change on a login page.
1420
1421 When the cookie was not presented by the client, the associated log column
1422 will report "-". When a request does not cause a cookie to be assigned by the
1423 server, a "-" is reported in the response column.
1424
1425 The capture is performed in the frontend only because it is necessary that
1426 the log format does not change for a given frontend depending on the
1427 backends. This may change in the future. Note that there can be only one
1428 "capture cookie" statement in a frontend. The maximum capture length is
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001429 configured in the sources by default to 64 characters. It is not possible to
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001430 specify a capture in a "defaults" section.
1431
1432 Example:
1433 capture cookie ASPSESSION len 32
1434
1435 See also : "capture request header", "capture response header" as well as
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001436 section 8 about logging.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001437
1438
1439capture request header <name> len <length>
1440 Capture and log the first occurrence of the specified request header.
1441 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1442 no | yes | yes | no
1443 Arguments :
1444 <name> is the name of the header to capture. The header names are not
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001445 case-sensitive, but it is a common practice to write them as they
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001446 appear in the requests, with the first letter of each word in
1447 upper case. The header name will not appear in the logs, only the
1448 value is reported, but the position in the logs is respected.
1449
1450 <length> is the maximum number of characters to extract from the value and
1451 report in the logs. The string will be truncated on the right if
1452 it exceeds <length>.
1453
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001454 Only the first value of the last occurrence of the header is captured. The
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001455 value will be added to the logs between braces ('{}'). If multiple headers
1456 are captured, they will be delimited by a vertical bar ('|') and will appear
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001457 in the same order they were declared in the configuration. Non-existent
1458 headers will be logged just as an empty string. Common uses for request
1459 header captures include the "Host" field in virtual hosting environments, the
1460 "Content-length" when uploads are supported, "User-agent" to quickly
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001461 differentiate between real users and robots, and "X-Forwarded-For" in proxied
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001462 environments to find where the request came from.
1463
1464 Note that when capturing headers such as "User-agent", some spaces may be
1465 logged, making the log analysis more difficult. Thus be careful about what
1466 you log if you know your log parser is not smart enough to rely on the
1467 braces.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001468
1469 There is no limit to the number of captured request headers, but each capture
1470 is limited to 64 characters. In order to keep log format consistent for a
1471 same frontend, header captures can only be declared in a frontend. It is not
1472 possible to specify a capture in a "defaults" section.
1473
1474 Example:
1475 capture request header Host len 15
1476 capture request header X-Forwarded-For len 15
1477 capture request header Referrer len 15
1478
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001479 See also : "capture cookie", "capture response header" as well as section 8
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001480 about logging.
1481
1482
1483capture response header <name> len <length>
1484 Capture and log the first occurrence of the specified response header.
1485 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1486 no | yes | yes | no
1487 Arguments :
1488 <name> is the name of the header to capture. The header names are not
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001489 case-sensitive, but it is a common practice to write them as they
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001490 appear in the response, with the first letter of each word in
1491 upper case. The header name will not appear in the logs, only the
1492 value is reported, but the position in the logs is respected.
1493
1494 <length> is the maximum number of characters to extract from the value and
1495 report in the logs. The string will be truncated on the right if
1496 it exceeds <length>.
1497
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001498 Only the first value of the last occurrence of the header is captured. The
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001499 result will be added to the logs between braces ('{}') after the captured
1500 request headers. If multiple headers are captured, they will be delimited by
1501 a vertical bar ('|') and will appear in the same order they were declared in
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001502 the configuration. Non-existent headers will be logged just as an empty
1503 string. Common uses for response header captures include the "Content-length"
1504 header which indicates how many bytes are expected to be returned, the
1505 "Location" header to track redirections.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001506
1507 There is no limit to the number of captured response headers, but each
1508 capture is limited to 64 characters. In order to keep log format consistent
1509 for a same frontend, header captures can only be declared in a frontend. It
1510 is not possible to specify a capture in a "defaults" section.
1511
1512 Example:
1513 capture response header Content-length len 9
1514 capture response header Location len 15
1515
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001516 See also : "capture cookie", "capture request header" as well as section 8
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001517 about logging.
1518
1519
1520clitimeout <timeout>
1521 Set the maximum inactivity time on the client side.
1522 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1523 yes | yes | yes | no
1524 Arguments :
1525 <timeout> is the timeout value is specified in milliseconds by default, but
1526 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
1527 as explained at the top of this document.
1528
1529 The inactivity timeout applies when the client is expected to acknowledge or
1530 send data. In HTTP mode, this timeout is particularly important to consider
1531 during the first phase, when the client sends the request, and during the
1532 response while it is reading data sent by the server. The value is specified
1533 in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other unit if the number is
1534 suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this document. In TCP mode
1535 (and to a lesser extent, in HTTP mode), it is highly recommended that the
1536 client timeout remains equal to the server timeout in order to avoid complex
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001537 situations to debug. It is a good practice to cover one or several TCP packet
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001538 losses by specifying timeouts that are slightly above multiples of 3 seconds
1539 (eg: 4 or 5 seconds).
1540
1541 This parameter is specific to frontends, but can be specified once for all in
1542 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
1543 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
1544 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
1545 during startup because it may results in accumulation of expired sessions in
1546 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
1547
1548 This parameter is provided for compatibility but is currently deprecated.
1549 Please use "timeout client" instead.
1550
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01001551 See also : "timeout client", "timeout http-request", "timeout server", and
1552 "srvtimeout".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001553
1554
1555contimeout <timeout>
1556 Set the maximum time to wait for a connection attempt to a server to succeed.
1557 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1558 yes | no | yes | yes
1559 Arguments :
1560 <timeout> is the timeout value is specified in milliseconds by default, but
1561 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
1562 as explained at the top of this document.
1563
1564 If the server is located on the same LAN as haproxy, the connection should be
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001565 immediate (less than a few milliseconds). Anyway, it is a good practice to
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01001566 cover one or several TCP packet losses by specifying timeouts that are
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001567 slightly above multiples of 3 seconds (eg: 4 or 5 seconds). By default, the
1568 connect timeout also presets the queue timeout to the same value if this one
1569 has not been specified. Historically, the contimeout was also used to set the
1570 tarpit timeout in a listen section, which is not possible in a pure frontend.
1571
1572 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
1573 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
1574 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
1575 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
1576 during startup because it may results in accumulation of failed sessions in
1577 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
1578
1579 This parameter is provided for backwards compatibility but is currently
1580 deprecated. Please use "timeout connect", "timeout queue" or "timeout tarpit"
1581 instead.
1582
1583 See also : "timeout connect", "timeout queue", "timeout tarpit",
1584 "timeout server", "contimeout".
1585
1586
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02001587cookie <name> [ rewrite | insert | prefix ] [ indirect ] [ nocache ]
Willy Tarreau68a897b2009-12-03 23:28:34 +01001588 [ postonly ] [ domain <domain> ]*
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001589 Enable cookie-based persistence in a backend.
1590 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1591 yes | no | yes | yes
1592 Arguments :
1593 <name> is the name of the cookie which will be monitored, modified or
1594 inserted in order to bring persistence. This cookie is sent to
1595 the client via a "Set-Cookie" header in the response, and is
1596 brought back by the client in a "Cookie" header in all requests.
1597 Special care should be taken to choose a name which does not
1598 conflict with any likely application cookie. Also, if the same
1599 backends are subject to be used by the same clients (eg:
1600 HTTP/HTTPS), care should be taken to use different cookie names
1601 between all backends if persistence between them is not desired.
1602
1603 rewrite This keyword indicates that the cookie will be provided by the
1604 server and that haproxy will have to modify its value to set the
1605 server's identifier in it. This mode is handy when the management
1606 of complex combinations of "Set-cookie" and "Cache-control"
1607 headers is left to the application. The application can then
1608 decide whether or not it is appropriate to emit a persistence
1609 cookie. Since all responses should be monitored, this mode only
1610 works in HTTP close mode. Unless the application behaviour is
1611 very complex and/or broken, it is advised not to start with this
1612 mode for new deployments. This keyword is incompatible with
1613 "insert" and "prefix".
1614
1615 insert This keyword indicates that the persistence cookie will have to
1616 be inserted by haproxy in the responses. If the server emits a
1617 cookie with the same name, it will be replaced anyway. For this
1618 reason, this mode can be used to upgrade existing configurations
1619 running in the "rewrite" mode. The cookie will only be a session
1620 cookie and will not be stored on the client's disk. Due to
1621 caching effects, it is generally wise to add the "indirect" and
1622 "nocache" or "postonly" keywords (see below). The "insert"
1623 keyword is not compatible with "rewrite" and "prefix".
1624
1625 prefix This keyword indicates that instead of relying on a dedicated
1626 cookie for the persistence, an existing one will be completed.
1627 This may be needed in some specific environments where the client
1628 does not support more than one single cookie and the application
1629 already needs it. In this case, whenever the server sets a cookie
1630 named <name>, it will be prefixed with the server's identifier
1631 and a delimiter. The prefix will be removed from all client
1632 requests so that the server still finds the cookie it emitted.
1633 Since all requests and responses are subject to being modified,
1634 this mode requires the HTTP close mode. The "prefix" keyword is
1635 not compatible with "rewrite" and "insert".
1636
1637 indirect When this option is specified in insert mode, cookies will only
1638 be added when the server was not reached after a direct access,
1639 which means that only when a server is elected after applying a
1640 load-balancing algorithm, or after a redispatch, then the cookie
1641 will be inserted. If the client has all the required information
1642 to connect to the same server next time, no further cookie will
1643 be inserted. In all cases, when the "indirect" option is used in
1644 insert mode, the cookie is always removed from the requests
1645 transmitted to the server. The persistence mechanism then becomes
1646 totally transparent from the application point of view.
1647
1648 nocache This option is recommended in conjunction with the insert mode
1649 when there is a cache between the client and HAProxy, as it
1650 ensures that a cacheable response will be tagged non-cacheable if
1651 a cookie needs to be inserted. This is important because if all
1652 persistence cookies are added on a cacheable home page for
1653 instance, then all customers will then fetch the page from an
1654 outer cache and will all share the same persistence cookie,
1655 leading to one server receiving much more traffic than others.
1656 See also the "insert" and "postonly" options.
1657
1658 postonly This option ensures that cookie insertion will only be performed
1659 on responses to POST requests. It is an alternative to the
1660 "nocache" option, because POST responses are not cacheable, so
1661 this ensures that the persistence cookie will never get cached.
1662 Since most sites do not need any sort of persistence before the
1663 first POST which generally is a login request, this is a very
1664 efficient method to optimize caching without risking to find a
1665 persistence cookie in the cache.
1666 See also the "insert" and "nocache" options.
1667
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiefe3b6f2008-05-23 23:49:32 +02001668 domain This option allows to specify the domain at which a cookie is
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001669 inserted. It requires exactly one parameter: a valid domain
Willy Tarreau68a897b2009-12-03 23:28:34 +01001670 name. If the domain begins with a dot, the browser is allowed to
1671 use it for any host ending with that name. It is also possible to
1672 specify several domain names by invoking this option multiple
1673 times. Some browsers might have small limits on the number of
1674 domains, so be careful when doing that. For the record, sending
1675 10 domains to MSIE 6 or Firefox 2 works as expected.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiefe3b6f2008-05-23 23:49:32 +02001676
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001677 There can be only one persistence cookie per HTTP backend, and it can be
1678 declared in a defaults section. The value of the cookie will be the value
1679 indicated after the "cookie" keyword in a "server" statement. If no cookie
1680 is declared for a given server, the cookie is not set.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02001681
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001682 Examples :
1683 cookie JSESSIONID prefix
1684 cookie SRV insert indirect nocache
1685 cookie SRV insert postonly indirect
1686
1687 See also : "appsession", "balance source", "capture cookie", "server".
1688
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01001689
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01001690default-server [param*]
1691 Change default options for a server in a backend
1692 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1693 yes | no | yes | yes
1694 Arguments:
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01001695 <param*> is a list of parameters for this server. The "default-server"
1696 keyword accepts an important number of options and has a complete
1697 section dedicated to it. Please refer to section 5 for more
1698 details.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01001699
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01001700 Example :
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01001701 default-server inter 1000 weight 13
1702
1703 See also: "server" and section 5 about server options
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001704
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01001705
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001706default_backend <backend>
1707 Specify the backend to use when no "use_backend" rule has been matched.
1708 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1709 yes | yes | yes | no
1710 Arguments :
1711 <backend> is the name of the backend to use.
1712
1713 When doing content-switching between frontend and backends using the
1714 "use_backend" keyword, it is often useful to indicate which backend will be
1715 used when no rule has matched. It generally is the dynamic backend which
1716 will catch all undetermined requests.
1717
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001718 Example :
1719
1720 use_backend dynamic if url_dyn
1721 use_backend static if url_css url_img extension_img
1722 default_backend dynamic
1723
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001724 See also : "use_backend", "reqsetbe", "reqisetbe"
1725
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001726
1727disabled
1728 Disable a proxy, frontend or backend.
1729 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1730 yes | yes | yes | yes
1731 Arguments : none
1732
1733 The "disabled" keyword is used to disable an instance, mainly in order to
1734 liberate a listening port or to temporarily disable a service. The instance
1735 will still be created and its configuration will be checked, but it will be
1736 created in the "stopped" state and will appear as such in the statistics. It
1737 will not receive any traffic nor will it send any health-checks or logs. It
1738 is possible to disable many instances at once by adding the "disabled"
1739 keyword in a "defaults" section.
1740
1741 See also : "enabled"
1742
1743
1744enabled
1745 Enable a proxy, frontend or backend.
1746 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1747 yes | yes | yes | yes
1748 Arguments : none
1749
1750 The "enabled" keyword is used to explicitly enable an instance, when the
1751 defaults has been set to "disabled". This is very rarely used.
1752
1753 See also : "disabled"
1754
1755
1756errorfile <code> <file>
1757 Return a file contents instead of errors generated by HAProxy
1758 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1759 yes | yes | yes | yes
1760 Arguments :
1761 <code> is the HTTP status code. Currently, HAProxy is capable of
1762 generating codes 400, 403, 408, 500, 502, 503, and 504.
1763
1764 <file> designates a file containing the full HTTP response. It is
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001765 recommended to follow the common practice of appending ".http" to
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001766 the filename so that people do not confuse the response with HTML
Willy Tarreau59140a22009-02-22 12:02:30 +01001767 error pages, and to use absolute paths, since files are read
1768 before any chroot is performed.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001769
1770 It is important to understand that this keyword is not meant to rewrite
1771 errors returned by the server, but errors detected and returned by HAProxy.
1772 This is why the list of supported errors is limited to a small set.
1773
1774 The files are returned verbatim on the TCP socket. This allows any trick such
1775 as redirections to another URL or site, as well as tricks to clean cookies,
1776 force enable or disable caching, etc... The package provides default error
1777 files returning the same contents as default errors.
1778
Willy Tarreau59140a22009-02-22 12:02:30 +01001779 The files should not exceed the configured buffer size (BUFSIZE), which
1780 generally is 8 or 16 kB, otherwise they will be truncated. It is also wise
1781 not to put any reference to local contents (eg: images) in order to avoid
1782 loops between the client and HAProxy when all servers are down, causing an
1783 error to be returned instead of an image. For better HTTP compliance, it is
1784 recommended that all header lines end with CR-LF and not LF alone.
1785
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001786 The files are read at the same time as the configuration and kept in memory.
1787 For this reason, the errors continue to be returned even when the process is
1788 chrooted, and no file change is considered while the process is running. A
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01001789 simple method for developing those files consists in associating them to the
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001790 403 status code and interrogating a blocked URL.
1791
1792 See also : "errorloc", "errorloc302", "errorloc303"
1793
Willy Tarreau59140a22009-02-22 12:02:30 +01001794 Example :
1795 errorfile 400 /etc/haproxy/errorfiles/400badreq.http
1796 errorfile 403 /etc/haproxy/errorfiles/403forbid.http
1797 errorfile 503 /etc/haproxy/errorfiles/503sorry.http
1798
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001799
1800errorloc <code> <url>
1801errorloc302 <code> <url>
1802 Return an HTTP redirection to a URL instead of errors generated by HAProxy
1803 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1804 yes | yes | yes | yes
1805 Arguments :
1806 <code> is the HTTP status code. Currently, HAProxy is capable of
1807 generating codes 400, 403, 408, 500, 502, 503, and 504.
1808
1809 <url> it is the exact contents of the "Location" header. It may contain
1810 either a relative URI to an error page hosted on the same site,
1811 or an absolute URI designating an error page on another site.
1812 Special care should be given to relative URIs to avoid redirect
1813 loops if the URI itself may generate the same error (eg: 500).
1814
1815 It is important to understand that this keyword is not meant to rewrite
1816 errors returned by the server, but errors detected and returned by HAProxy.
1817 This is why the list of supported errors is limited to a small set.
1818
1819 Note that both keyword return the HTTP 302 status code, which tells the
1820 client to fetch the designated URL using the same HTTP method. This can be
1821 quite problematic in case of non-GET methods such as POST, because the URL
1822 sent to the client might not be allowed for something other than GET. To
1823 workaround this problem, please use "errorloc303" which send the HTTP 303
1824 status code, indicating to the client that the URL must be fetched with a GET
1825 request.
1826
1827 See also : "errorfile", "errorloc303"
1828
1829
1830errorloc303 <code> <url>
1831 Return an HTTP redirection to a URL instead of errors generated by HAProxy
1832 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1833 yes | yes | yes | yes
1834 Arguments :
1835 <code> is the HTTP status code. Currently, HAProxy is capable of
1836 generating codes 400, 403, 408, 500, 502, 503, and 504.
1837
1838 <url> it is the exact contents of the "Location" header. It may contain
1839 either a relative URI to an error page hosted on the same site,
1840 or an absolute URI designating an error page on another site.
1841 Special care should be given to relative URIs to avoid redirect
1842 loops if the URI itself may generate the same error (eg: 500).
1843
1844 It is important to understand that this keyword is not meant to rewrite
1845 errors returned by the server, but errors detected and returned by HAProxy.
1846 This is why the list of supported errors is limited to a small set.
1847
1848 Note that both keyword return the HTTP 303 status code, which tells the
1849 client to fetch the designated URL using the same HTTP GET method. This
1850 solves the usual problems associated with "errorloc" and the 302 code. It is
1851 possible that some very old browsers designed before HTTP/1.1 do not support
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001852 it, but no such problem has been reported till now.
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001853
1854 See also : "errorfile", "errorloc", "errorloc302"
1855
1856
Willy Tarreau4de91492010-01-22 19:10:05 +01001857force-persist { if | unless } <condition>
1858 Declare a condition to force persistence on down servers
1859 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1860 no | yes | yes | yes
1861
1862 By default, requests are not dispatched to down servers. It is possible to
1863 force this using "option persist", but it is unconditional and redispatches
1864 to a valid server if "option redispatch" is set. That leaves with very little
1865 possibilities to force some requests to reach a server which is artificially
1866 marked down for maintenance operations.
1867
1868 The "force-persist" statement allows one to declare various ACL-based
1869 conditions which, when met, will cause a request to ignore the down status of
1870 a server and still try to connect to it. That makes it possible to start a
1871 server, still replying an error to the health checks, and run a specially
1872 configured browser to test the service. Among the handy methods, one could
1873 use a specific source IP address, or a specific cookie. The cookie also has
1874 the advantage that it can easily be added/removed on the browser from a test
1875 page. Once the service is validated, it is then possible to open the service
1876 to the world by returning a valid response to health checks.
1877
1878 The forced persistence is enabled when an "if" condition is met, or unless an
1879 "unless" condition is met. The final redispatch is always disabled when this
1880 is used.
1881
1882 See also : "option redispatch", "persist", and section 7 about ACL usage.
1883
1884
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001885fullconn <conns>
1886 Specify at what backend load the servers will reach their maxconn
1887 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1888 yes | no | yes | yes
1889 Arguments :
1890 <conns> is the number of connections on the backend which will make the
1891 servers use the maximal number of connections.
1892
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01001893 When a server has a "maxconn" parameter specified, it means that its number
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001894 of concurrent connections will never go higher. Additionally, if it has a
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01001895 "minconn" parameter, it indicates a dynamic limit following the backend's
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001896 load. The server will then always accept at least <minconn> connections,
1897 never more than <maxconn>, and the limit will be on the ramp between both
1898 values when the backend has less than <conns> concurrent connections. This
1899 makes it possible to limit the load on the servers during normal loads, but
1900 push it further for important loads without overloading the servers during
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001901 exceptional loads.
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001902
1903 Example :
1904 # The servers will accept between 100 and 1000 concurrent connections each
1905 # and the maximum of 1000 will be reached when the backend reaches 10000
1906 # connections.
1907 backend dynamic
1908 fullconn 10000
1909 server srv1 dyn1:80 minconn 100 maxconn 1000
1910 server srv2 dyn2:80 minconn 100 maxconn 1000
1911
1912 See also : "maxconn", "server"
1913
1914
1915grace <time>
1916 Maintain a proxy operational for some time after a soft stop
1917 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Cyril Bonté99ed3272010-01-24 23:29:44 +01001918 yes | yes | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001919 Arguments :
1920 <time> is the time (by default in milliseconds) for which the instance
1921 will remain operational with the frontend sockets still listening
1922 when a soft-stop is received via the SIGUSR1 signal.
1923
1924 This may be used to ensure that the services disappear in a certain order.
1925 This was designed so that frontends which are dedicated to monitoring by an
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001926 external equipment fail immediately while other ones remain up for the time
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001927 needed by the equipment to detect the failure.
1928
1929 Note that currently, there is very little benefit in using this parameter,
1930 and it may in fact complicate the soft-reconfiguration process more than
1931 simplify it.
1932
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001933
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001934hash-type <method>
1935 Specify a method to use for mapping hashes to servers
1936 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1937 yes | no | yes | yes
1938 Arguments :
1939 map-based the hash table is a static array containing all alive servers.
1940 The hashes will be very smooth, will consider weights, but will
1941 be static in that weight changes while a server is up will be
1942 ignored. This means that there will be no slow start. Also,
1943 since a server is selected by its position in the array, most
1944 mappings are changed when the server count changes. This means
1945 that when a server goes up or down, or when a server is added
1946 to a farm, most connections will be redistributed to different
1947 servers. This can be inconvenient with caches for instance.
1948
1949 consistent the hash table is a tree filled with many occurrences of each
1950 server. The hash key is looked up in the tree and the closest
1951 server is chosen. This hash is dynamic, it supports changing
1952 weights while the servers are up, so it is compatible with the
1953 slow start feature. It has the advantage that when a server
1954 goes up or down, only its associations are moved. When a server
1955 is added to the farm, only a few part of the mappings are
1956 redistributed, making it an ideal algorithm for caches.
1957 However, due to its principle, the algorithm will never be very
1958 smooth and it may sometimes be necessary to adjust a server's
1959 weight or its ID to get a more balanced distribution. In order
1960 to get the same distribution on multiple load balancers, it is
1961 important that all servers have the same IDs.
1962
1963 The default hash type is "map-based" and is recommended for most usages.
1964
1965 See also : "balance", "server"
1966
1967
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001968http-check disable-on-404
1969 Enable a maintenance mode upon HTTP/404 response to health-checks
1970 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001971 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001972 Arguments : none
1973
1974 When this option is set, a server which returns an HTTP code 404 will be
1975 excluded from further load-balancing, but will still receive persistent
1976 connections. This provides a very convenient method for Web administrators
1977 to perform a graceful shutdown of their servers. It is also important to note
1978 that a server which is detected as failed while it was in this mode will not
1979 generate an alert, just a notice. If the server responds 2xx or 3xx again, it
1980 will immediately be reinserted into the farm. The status on the stats page
1981 reports "NOLB" for a server in this mode. It is important to note that this
1982 option only works in conjunction with the "httpchk" option.
1983
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001984 See also : "option httpchk"
1985
1986
Willy Tarreauef781042010-01-27 11:53:01 +01001987http-check send-state
1988 Enable emission of a state header with HTTP health checks
1989 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1990 yes | no | yes | yes
1991 Arguments : none
1992
1993 When this option is set, haproxy will systematically send a special header
1994 "X-Haproxy-Server-State" with a list of parameters indicating to each server
1995 how they are seen by haproxy. This can be used for instance when a server is
1996 manipulated without access to haproxy and the operator needs to know whether
1997 haproxy still sees it up or not, or if the server is the last one in a farm.
1998
1999 The header is composed of fields delimited by semi-colons, the first of which
2000 is a word ("UP", "DOWN", "NOLB"), possibly followed by a number of valid
2001 checks on the total number before transition, just as appears in the stats
2002 interface. Next headers are in the form "<variable>=<value>", indicating in
2003 no specific order some values available in the stats interface :
2004 - a variable "name", containing the name of the backend followed by a slash
2005 ("/") then the name of the server. This can be used when a server is
2006 checked in multiple backends.
2007
2008 - a variable "node" containing the name of the haproxy node, as set in the
2009 global "node" variable, otherwise the system's hostname if unspecified.
2010
2011 - a variable "weight" indicating the weight of the server, a slash ("/")
2012 and the total weight of the farm (just counting usable servers). This
2013 helps to know if other servers are available to handle the load when this
2014 one fails.
2015
2016 - a variable "scur" indicating the current number of concurrent connections
2017 on the server, followed by a slash ("/") then the total number of
2018 connections on all servers of the same backend.
2019
2020 - a variable "qcur" indicating the current number of requests in the
2021 server's queue.
2022
2023 Example of a header received by the application server :
2024 >>> X-Haproxy-Server-State: UP 2/3; name=bck/srv2; node=lb1; weight=1/2; \
2025 scur=13/22; qcur=0
2026
2027 See also : "option httpchk", "http-check disable-on-404"
2028
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01002029http-request { allow | deny | http-auth [realm <realm>] } [ { if | unless } <condition> ]
2030 Access control for Layer 7 requests
2031
2032 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2033 no | yes | yes | yes
2034
2035 These set of options allow to fine control access to a
2036 frontend/listen/backend. Each option may be followed by if/unless and acl.
2037 First option with matched condition (or option without condition) is final.
2038 For "block" a 403 error will be returned, for "allow" normal processing is
2039 performed, for "http-auth" a 401/407 error code is returned so the client
2040 should be asked to enter a username and password.
2041
2042 There is no fixed limit to the number of http-request statements per
2043 instance.
2044
2045 Example:
2046 acl nagios src 192.168.129.3
2047 acl local_net src 192.168.0.0/16
2048 acl auth_ok http_auth(L1)
2049
2050 http-request allow if nagios
2051 http-request allow if local_net auth_ok
2052 http-request auth realm Gimme if local_net auth_ok
2053 http-request deny
2054
2055 Exampe:
2056 acl auth_ok http_auth_group(L1) G1
2057
2058 http-request auth unless auth_ok
2059
2060 See section 3.4 about userlists and 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreauef781042010-01-27 11:53:01 +01002061
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01002062id <value>
Willy Tarreau53fb4ae2009-10-04 23:04:08 +02002063 Set a persistent ID to a proxy.
2064 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2065 no | yes | yes | yes
2066 Arguments : none
2067
2068 Set a persistent ID for the proxy. This ID must be unique and positive.
2069 An unused ID will automatically be assigned if unset. The first assigned
2070 value will be 1. This ID is currently only returned in statistics.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01002071
2072
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002073log global
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +02002074log <address> <facility> [<level> [<minlevel>]]
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002075 Enable per-instance logging of events and traffic.
2076 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2077 yes | yes | yes | yes
2078 Arguments :
2079 global should be used when the instance's logging parameters are the
2080 same as the global ones. This is the most common usage. "global"
2081 replaces <address>, <facility> and <level> with those of the log
2082 entries found in the "global" section. Only one "log global"
2083 statement may be used per instance, and this form takes no other
2084 parameter.
2085
2086 <address> indicates where to send the logs. It takes the same format as
2087 for the "global" section's logs, and can be one of :
2088
2089 - An IPv4 address optionally followed by a colon (':') and a UDP
2090 port. If no port is specified, 514 is used by default (the
2091 standard syslog port).
2092
2093 - A filesystem path to a UNIX domain socket, keeping in mind
2094 considerations for chroot (be sure the path is accessible
2095 inside the chroot) and uid/gid (be sure the path is
2096 appropriately writeable).
2097
2098 <facility> must be one of the 24 standard syslog facilities :
2099
2100 kern user mail daemon auth syslog lpr news
2101 uucp cron auth2 ftp ntp audit alert cron2
2102 local0 local1 local2 local3 local4 local5 local6 local7
2103
2104 <level> is optional and can be specified to filter outgoing messages. By
2105 default, all messages are sent. If a level is specified, only
2106 messages with a severity at least as important as this level
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +02002107 will be sent. An optional minimum level can be specified. If it
2108 is set, logs emitted with a more severe level than this one will
2109 be capped to this level. This is used to avoid sending "emerg"
2110 messages on all terminals on some default syslog configurations.
2111 Eight levels are known :
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002112
2113 emerg alert crit err warning notice info debug
2114
2115 Note that up to two "log" entries may be specified per instance. However, if
2116 "log global" is used and if the "global" section already contains 2 log
2117 entries, then additional log entries will be ignored.
2118
2119 Also, it is important to keep in mind that it is the frontend which decides
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01002120 what to log from a connection, and that in case of content switching, the log
2121 entries from the backend will be ignored. Connections are logged at level
2122 "info".
2123
2124 However, backend log declaration define how and where servers status changes
2125 will be logged. Level "notice" will be used to indicate a server going up,
2126 "warning" will be used for termination signals and definitive service
2127 termination, and "alert" will be used for when a server goes down.
2128
2129 Note : According to RFC3164, messages are truncated to 1024 bytes before
2130 being emitted.
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002131
2132 Example :
2133 log global
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +02002134 log 127.0.0.1:514 local0 notice # only send important events
2135 log 127.0.0.1:514 local0 notice notice # same but limit output level
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002136
2137
2138maxconn <conns>
2139 Fix the maximum number of concurrent connections on a frontend
2140 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2141 yes | yes | yes | no
2142 Arguments :
2143 <conns> is the maximum number of concurrent connections the frontend will
2144 accept to serve. Excess connections will be queued by the system
2145 in the socket's listen queue and will be served once a connection
2146 closes.
2147
2148 If the system supports it, it can be useful on big sites to raise this limit
2149 very high so that haproxy manages connection queues, instead of leaving the
2150 clients with unanswered connection attempts. This value should not exceed the
2151 global maxconn. Also, keep in mind that a connection contains two buffers
2152 of 8kB each, as well as some other data resulting in about 17 kB of RAM being
2153 consumed per established connection. That means that a medium system equipped
2154 with 1GB of RAM can withstand around 40000-50000 concurrent connections if
2155 properly tuned.
2156
2157 Also, when <conns> is set to large values, it is possible that the servers
2158 are not sized to accept such loads, and for this reason it is generally wise
2159 to assign them some reasonable connection limits.
2160
2161 See also : "server", global section's "maxconn", "fullconn"
2162
2163
2164mode { tcp|http|health }
2165 Set the running mode or protocol of the instance
2166 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2167 yes | yes | yes | yes
2168 Arguments :
2169 tcp The instance will work in pure TCP mode. A full-duplex connection
2170 will be established between clients and servers, and no layer 7
2171 examination will be performed. This is the default mode. It
2172 should be used for SSL, SSH, SMTP, ...
2173
2174 http The instance will work in HTTP mode. The client request will be
2175 analyzed in depth before connecting to any server. Any request
2176 which is not RFC-compliant will be rejected. Layer 7 filtering,
2177 processing and switching will be possible. This is the mode which
2178 brings HAProxy most of its value.
2179
2180 health The instance will work in "health" mode. It will just reply "OK"
2181 to incoming connections and close the connection. Nothing will be
2182 logged. This mode is used to reply to external components health
2183 checks. This mode is deprecated and should not be used anymore as
2184 it is possible to do the same and even better by combining TCP or
2185 HTTP modes with the "monitor" keyword.
2186
2187 When doing content switching, it is mandatory that the frontend and the
2188 backend are in the same mode (generally HTTP), otherwise the configuration
2189 will be refused.
2190
2191 Example :
2192 defaults http_instances
2193 mode http
2194
2195 See also : "monitor", "monitor-net"
2196
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002197
2198monitor fail [if | unless] <condition>
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002199 Add a condition to report a failure to a monitor HTTP request.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002200 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2201 no | yes | yes | no
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002202 Arguments :
2203 if <cond> the monitor request will fail if the condition is satisfied,
2204 and will succeed otherwise. The condition should describe a
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002205 combined test which must induce a failure if all conditions
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002206 are met, for instance a low number of servers both in a
2207 backend and its backup.
2208
2209 unless <cond> the monitor request will succeed only if the condition is
2210 satisfied, and will fail otherwise. Such a condition may be
2211 based on a test on the presence of a minimum number of active
2212 servers in a list of backends.
2213
2214 This statement adds a condition which can force the response to a monitor
2215 request to report a failure. By default, when an external component queries
2216 the URI dedicated to monitoring, a 200 response is returned. When one of the
2217 conditions above is met, haproxy will return 503 instead of 200. This is
2218 very useful to report a site failure to an external component which may base
2219 routing advertisements between multiple sites on the availability reported by
2220 haproxy. In this case, one would rely on an ACL involving the "nbsrv"
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002221 criterion. Note that "monitor fail" only works in HTTP mode.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002222
2223 Example:
2224 frontend www
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002225 mode http
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002226 acl site_dead nbsrv(dynamic) lt 2
2227 acl site_dead nbsrv(static) lt 2
2228 monitor-uri /site_alive
2229 monitor fail if site_dead
2230
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002231 See also : "monitor-net", "monitor-uri"
2232
2233
2234monitor-net <source>
2235 Declare a source network which is limited to monitor requests
2236 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2237 yes | yes | yes | no
2238 Arguments :
2239 <source> is the source IPv4 address or network which will only be able to
2240 get monitor responses to any request. It can be either an IPv4
2241 address, a host name, or an address followed by a slash ('/')
2242 followed by a mask.
2243
2244 In TCP mode, any connection coming from a source matching <source> will cause
2245 the connection to be immediately closed without any log. This allows another
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002246 equipment to probe the port and verify that it is still listening, without
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002247 forwarding the connection to a remote server.
2248
2249 In HTTP mode, a connection coming from a source matching <source> will be
2250 accepted, the following response will be sent without waiting for a request,
2251 then the connection will be closed : "HTTP/1.0 200 OK". This is normally
2252 enough for any front-end HTTP probe to detect that the service is UP and
2253 running without forwarding the request to a backend server.
2254
2255 Monitor requests are processed very early. It is not possible to block nor
2256 divert them using ACLs. They cannot be logged either, and it is the intended
2257 purpose. They are only used to report HAProxy's health to an upper component,
2258 nothing more. Right now, it is not possible to set failure conditions on
2259 requests caught by "monitor-net".
2260
2261 Example :
2262 # addresses .252 and .253 are just probing us.
2263 frontend www
2264 monitor-net 192.168.0.252/31
2265
2266 See also : "monitor fail", "monitor-uri"
2267
2268
2269monitor-uri <uri>
2270 Intercept a URI used by external components' monitor requests
2271 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2272 yes | yes | yes | no
2273 Arguments :
2274 <uri> is the exact URI which we want to intercept to return HAProxy's
2275 health status instead of forwarding the request.
2276
2277 When an HTTP request referencing <uri> will be received on a frontend,
2278 HAProxy will not forward it nor log it, but instead will return either
2279 "HTTP/1.0 200 OK" or "HTTP/1.0 503 Service unavailable", depending on failure
2280 conditions defined with "monitor fail". This is normally enough for any
2281 front-end HTTP probe to detect that the service is UP and running without
2282 forwarding the request to a backend server. Note that the HTTP method, the
2283 version and all headers are ignored, but the request must at least be valid
2284 at the HTTP level. This keyword may only be used with an HTTP-mode frontend.
2285
2286 Monitor requests are processed very early. It is not possible to block nor
2287 divert them using ACLs. They cannot be logged either, and it is the intended
2288 purpose. They are only used to report HAProxy's health to an upper component,
2289 nothing more. However, it is possible to add any number of conditions using
2290 "monitor fail" and ACLs so that the result can be adjusted to whatever check
2291 can be imagined (most often the number of available servers in a backend).
2292
2293 Example :
2294 # Use /haproxy_test to report haproxy's status
2295 frontend www
2296 mode http
2297 monitor-uri /haproxy_test
2298
2299 See also : "monitor fail", "monitor-net"
2300
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002301
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002302option abortonclose
2303no option abortonclose
2304 Enable or disable early dropping of aborted requests pending in queues.
2305 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2306 yes | no | yes | yes
2307 Arguments : none
2308
2309 In presence of very high loads, the servers will take some time to respond.
2310 The per-instance connection queue will inflate, and the response time will
2311 increase respective to the size of the queue times the average per-session
2312 response time. When clients will wait for more than a few seconds, they will
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002313 often hit the "STOP" button on their browser, leaving a useless request in
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002314 the queue, and slowing down other users, and the servers as well, because the
2315 request will eventually be served, then aborted at the first error
2316 encountered while delivering the response.
2317
2318 As there is no way to distinguish between a full STOP and a simple output
2319 close on the client side, HTTP agents should be conservative and consider
2320 that the client might only have closed its output channel while waiting for
2321 the response. However, this introduces risks of congestion when lots of users
2322 do the same, and is completely useless nowadays because probably no client at
2323 all will close the session while waiting for the response. Some HTTP agents
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01002324 support this behaviour (Squid, Apache, HAProxy), and others do not (TUX, most
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002325 hardware-based load balancers). So the probability for a closed input channel
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002326 to represent a user hitting the "STOP" button is close to 100%, and the risk
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002327 of being the single component to break rare but valid traffic is extremely
2328 low, which adds to the temptation to be able to abort a session early while
2329 still not served and not pollute the servers.
2330
2331 In HAProxy, the user can choose the desired behaviour using the option
2332 "abortonclose". By default (without the option) the behaviour is HTTP
2333 compliant and aborted requests will be served. But when the option is
2334 specified, a session with an incoming channel closed will be aborted while
2335 it is still possible, either pending in the queue for a connection slot, or
2336 during the connection establishment if the server has not yet acknowledged
2337 the connection request. This considerably reduces the queue size and the load
2338 on saturated servers when users are tempted to click on STOP, which in turn
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01002339 reduces the response time for other users.
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002340
2341 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2342 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2343
2344 See also : "timeout queue" and server's "maxconn" and "maxqueue" parameters
2345
2346
Willy Tarreau4076a152009-04-02 15:18:36 +02002347option accept-invalid-http-request
2348no option accept-invalid-http-request
2349 Enable or disable relaxing of HTTP request parsing
2350 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2351 yes | yes | yes | no
2352 Arguments : none
2353
2354 By default, HAProxy complies with RFC2616 in terms of message parsing. This
2355 means that invalid characters in header names are not permitted and cause an
2356 error to be returned to the client. This is the desired behaviour as such
2357 forbidden characters are essentially used to build attacks exploiting server
2358 weaknesses, and bypass security filtering. Sometimes, a buggy browser or
2359 server will emit invalid header names for whatever reason (configuration,
2360 implementation) and the issue will not be immediately fixed. In such a case,
2361 it is possible to relax HAProxy's header name parser to accept any character
2362 even if that does not make sense, by specifying this option.
2363
2364 This option should never be enabled by default as it hides application bugs
2365 and open security breaches. It should only be deployed after a problem has
2366 been confirmed.
2367
2368 When this option is enabled, erroneous header names will still be accepted in
2369 requests, but the complete request will be captured in order to permit later
2370 analysis using the "show errors" request on the UNIX stats socket. Doing this
2371 also helps confirming that the issue has been solved.
2372
2373 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2374 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2375
2376 See also : "option accept-invalid-http-response" and "show errors" on the
2377 stats socket.
2378
2379
2380option accept-invalid-http-response
2381no option accept-invalid-http-response
2382 Enable or disable relaxing of HTTP response parsing
2383 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2384 yes | no | yes | yes
2385 Arguments : none
2386
2387 By default, HAProxy complies with RFC2616 in terms of message parsing. This
2388 means that invalid characters in header names are not permitted and cause an
2389 error to be returned to the client. This is the desired behaviour as such
2390 forbidden characters are essentially used to build attacks exploiting server
2391 weaknesses, and bypass security filtering. Sometimes, a buggy browser or
2392 server will emit invalid header names for whatever reason (configuration,
2393 implementation) and the issue will not be immediately fixed. In such a case,
2394 it is possible to relax HAProxy's header name parser to accept any character
2395 even if that does not make sense, by specifying this option.
2396
2397 This option should never be enabled by default as it hides application bugs
2398 and open security breaches. It should only be deployed after a problem has
2399 been confirmed.
2400
2401 When this option is enabled, erroneous header names will still be accepted in
2402 responses, but the complete response will be captured in order to permit
2403 later analysis using the "show errors" request on the UNIX stats socket.
2404 Doing this also helps confirming that the issue has been solved.
2405
2406 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2407 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2408
2409 See also : "option accept-invalid-http-request" and "show errors" on the
2410 stats socket.
2411
2412
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002413option allbackups
2414no option allbackups
2415 Use either all backup servers at a time or only the first one
2416 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2417 yes | no | yes | yes
2418 Arguments : none
2419
2420 By default, the first operational backup server gets all traffic when normal
2421 servers are all down. Sometimes, it may be preferred to use multiple backups
2422 at once, because one will not be enough. When "option allbackups" is enabled,
2423 the load balancing will be performed among all backup servers when all normal
2424 ones are unavailable. The same load balancing algorithm will be used and the
2425 servers' weights will be respected. Thus, there will not be any priority
2426 order between the backup servers anymore.
2427
2428 This option is mostly used with static server farms dedicated to return a
2429 "sorry" page when an application is completely offline.
2430
2431 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2432 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2433
2434
2435option checkcache
2436no option checkcache
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002437 Analyze all server responses and block requests with cacheable cookies
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002438 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2439 yes | no | yes | yes
2440 Arguments : none
2441
2442 Some high-level frameworks set application cookies everywhere and do not
2443 always let enough control to the developer to manage how the responses should
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002444 be cached. When a session cookie is returned on a cacheable object, there is a
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002445 high risk of session crossing or stealing between users traversing the same
2446 caches. In some situations, it is better to block the response than to let
2447 some sensible session information go in the wild.
2448
2449 The option "checkcache" enables deep inspection of all server responses for
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002450 strict compliance with HTTP specification in terms of cacheability. It
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002451 carefully checks "Cache-control", "Pragma" and "Set-cookie" headers in server
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002452 response to check if there's a risk of caching a cookie on a client-side
2453 proxy. When this option is enabled, the only responses which can be delivered
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002454 to the client are :
2455 - all those without "Set-Cookie" header ;
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002456 - all those with a return code other than 200, 203, 206, 300, 301, 410,
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002457 provided that the server has not set a "Cache-control: public" header ;
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002458 - all those that come from a POST request, provided that the server has not
2459 set a 'Cache-Control: public' header ;
2460 - those with a 'Pragma: no-cache' header
2461 - those with a 'Cache-control: private' header
2462 - those with a 'Cache-control: no-store' header
2463 - those with a 'Cache-control: max-age=0' header
2464 - those with a 'Cache-control: s-maxage=0' header
2465 - those with a 'Cache-control: no-cache' header
2466 - those with a 'Cache-control: no-cache="set-cookie"' header
2467 - those with a 'Cache-control: no-cache="set-cookie,' header
2468 (allowing other fields after set-cookie)
2469
2470 If a response doesn't respect these requirements, then it will be blocked
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002471 just as if it was from an "rspdeny" filter, with an "HTTP 502 bad gateway".
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002472 The session state shows "PH--" meaning that the proxy blocked the response
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002473 during headers processing. Additionally, an alert will be sent in the logs so
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002474 that admins are informed that there's something to be fixed.
2475
2476 Due to the high impact on the application, the application should be tested
2477 in depth with the option enabled before going to production. It is also a
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01002478 good practice to always activate it during tests, even if it is not used in
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002479 production, as it will report potentially dangerous application behaviours.
2480
2481 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2482 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2483
2484
2485option clitcpka
2486no option clitcpka
2487 Enable or disable the sending of TCP keepalive packets on the client side
2488 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2489 yes | yes | yes | no
2490 Arguments : none
2491
2492 When there is a firewall or any session-aware component between a client and
2493 a server, and when the protocol involves very long sessions with long idle
2494 periods (eg: remote desktops), there is a risk that one of the intermediate
2495 components decides to expire a session which has remained idle for too long.
2496
2497 Enabling socket-level TCP keep-alives makes the system regularly send packets
2498 to the other end of the connection, leaving it active. The delay between
2499 keep-alive probes is controlled by the system only and depends both on the
2500 operating system and its tuning parameters.
2501
2502 It is important to understand that keep-alive packets are neither emitted nor
2503 received at the application level. It is only the network stacks which sees
2504 them. For this reason, even if one side of the proxy already uses keep-alives
2505 to maintain its connection alive, those keep-alive packets will not be
2506 forwarded to the other side of the proxy.
2507
2508 Please note that this has nothing to do with HTTP keep-alive.
2509
2510 Using option "clitcpka" enables the emission of TCP keep-alive probes on the
2511 client side of a connection, which should help when session expirations are
2512 noticed between HAProxy and a client.
2513
2514 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2515 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2516
2517 See also : "option srvtcpka", "option tcpka"
2518
2519
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002520option contstats
2521 Enable continuous traffic statistics updates
2522 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2523 yes | yes | yes | no
2524 Arguments : none
2525
2526 By default, counters used for statistics calculation are incremented
2527 only when a session finishes. It works quite well when serving small
2528 objects, but with big ones (for example large images or archives) or
2529 with A/V streaming, a graph generated from haproxy counters looks like
2530 a hedgehog. With this option enabled counters get incremented continuously,
2531 during a whole session. Recounting touches a hotpath directly so
2532 it is not enabled by default, as it has small performance impact (~0.5%).
2533
2534
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02002535option dontlog-normal
2536no option dontlog-normal
2537 Enable or disable logging of normal, successful connections
2538 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2539 yes | yes | yes | no
2540 Arguments : none
2541
2542 There are large sites dealing with several thousand connections per second
2543 and for which logging is a major pain. Some of them are even forced to turn
2544 logs off and cannot debug production issues. Setting this option ensures that
2545 normal connections, those which experience no error, no timeout, no retry nor
2546 redispatch, will not be logged. This leaves disk space for anomalies. In HTTP
2547 mode, the response status code is checked and return codes 5xx will still be
2548 logged.
2549
2550 It is strongly discouraged to use this option as most of the time, the key to
2551 complex issues is in the normal logs which will not be logged here. If you
2552 need to separate logs, see the "log-separate-errors" option instead.
2553
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02002554 See also : "log", "dontlognull", "log-separate-errors" and section 8 about
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02002555 logging.
2556
2557
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002558option dontlognull
2559no option dontlognull
2560 Enable or disable logging of null connections
2561 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2562 yes | yes | yes | no
2563 Arguments : none
2564
2565 In certain environments, there are components which will regularly connect to
2566 various systems to ensure that they are still alive. It can be the case from
2567 another load balancer as well as from monitoring systems. By default, even a
2568 simple port probe or scan will produce a log. If those connections pollute
2569 the logs too much, it is possible to enable option "dontlognull" to indicate
2570 that a connection on which no data has been transferred will not be logged,
2571 which typically corresponds to those probes.
2572
2573 It is generally recommended not to use this option in uncontrolled
2574 environments (eg: internet), otherwise scans and other malicious activities
2575 would not be logged.
2576
2577 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2578 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2579
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02002580 See also : "log", "monitor-net", "monitor-uri" and section 8 about logging.
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002581
2582
2583option forceclose
2584no option forceclose
2585 Enable or disable active connection closing after response is transferred.
2586 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreaua31e5df2009-12-30 01:10:35 +01002587 yes | yes | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002588 Arguments : none
2589
2590 Some HTTP servers do not necessarily close the connections when they receive
2591 the "Connection: close" set by "option httpclose", and if the client does not
2592 close either, then the connection remains open till the timeout expires. This
2593 causes high number of simultaneous connections on the servers and shows high
2594 global session times in the logs.
2595
2596 When this happens, it is possible to use "option forceclose". It will
Willy Tarreau82eeaf22009-12-29 12:09:05 +01002597 actively close the outgoing server channel as soon as the server has finished
Willy Tarreau0dfdf192010-01-05 11:33:11 +01002598 to respond. This option implicitly enables the "httpclose" option. Note that
2599 this option also enables the parsing of the full request and response, which
2600 means we can close the connection to the server very quickly, releasing some
2601 resources earlier than with httpclose.
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002602
2603 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2604 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2605
2606 See also : "option httpclose"
2607
2608
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002609option forwardfor [ except <network> ] [ header <name> ]
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002610 Enable insertion of the X-Forwarded-For header to requests sent to servers
2611 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2612 yes | yes | yes | yes
2613 Arguments :
2614 <network> is an optional argument used to disable this option for sources
2615 matching <network>
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002616 <name> an optional argument to specify a different "X-Forwarded-For"
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01002617 header name.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002618
2619 Since HAProxy works in reverse-proxy mode, the servers see its IP address as
2620 their client address. This is sometimes annoying when the client's IP address
2621 is expected in server logs. To solve this problem, the well-known HTTP header
2622 "X-Forwarded-For" may be added by HAProxy to all requests sent to the server.
2623 This header contains a value representing the client's IP address. Since this
2624 header is always appended at the end of the existing header list, the server
2625 must be configured to always use the last occurrence of this header only. See
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002626 the server's manual to find how to enable use of this standard header. Note
2627 that only the last occurrence of the header must be used, since it is really
2628 possible that the client has already brought one.
2629
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01002630 The keyword "header" may be used to supply a different header name to replace
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002631 the default "X-Forwarded-For". This can be useful where you might already
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01002632 have a "X-Forwarded-For" header from a different application (eg: stunnel),
2633 and you need preserve it. Also if your backend server doesn't use the
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002634 "X-Forwarded-For" header and requires different one (eg: Zeus Web Servers
2635 require "X-Cluster-Client-IP").
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002636
2637 Sometimes, a same HAProxy instance may be shared between a direct client
2638 access and a reverse-proxy access (for instance when an SSL reverse-proxy is
2639 used to decrypt HTTPS traffic). It is possible to disable the addition of the
2640 header for a known source address or network by adding the "except" keyword
2641 followed by the network address. In this case, any source IP matching the
2642 network will not cause an addition of this header. Most common uses are with
2643 private networks or 127.0.0.1.
2644
2645 This option may be specified either in the frontend or in the backend. If at
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002646 least one of them uses it, the header will be added. Note that the backend's
2647 setting of the header subargument takes precedence over the frontend's if
2648 both are defined.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002649
2650 It is important to note that as long as HAProxy does not support keep-alive
2651 connections, only the first request of a connection will receive the header.
2652 For this reason, it is important to ensure that "option httpclose" is set
2653 when using this option.
2654
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002655 Examples :
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002656 # Public HTTP address also used by stunnel on the same machine
2657 frontend www
2658 mode http
2659 option forwardfor except 127.0.0.1 # stunnel already adds the header
2660
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002661 # Those servers want the IP Address in X-Client
2662 backend www
2663 mode http
2664 option forwardfor header X-Client
2665
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002666 See also : "option httpclose"
2667
2668
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002669option httpchk
2670option httpchk <uri>
2671option httpchk <method> <uri>
2672option httpchk <method> <uri> <version>
2673 Enable HTTP protocol to check on the servers health
2674 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2675 yes | no | yes | yes
2676 Arguments :
2677 <method> is the optional HTTP method used with the requests. When not set,
2678 the "OPTIONS" method is used, as it generally requires low server
2679 processing and is easy to filter out from the logs. Any method
2680 may be used, though it is not recommended to invent non-standard
2681 ones.
2682
2683 <uri> is the URI referenced in the HTTP requests. It defaults to " / "
2684 which is accessible by default on almost any server, but may be
2685 changed to any other URI. Query strings are permitted.
2686
2687 <version> is the optional HTTP version string. It defaults to "HTTP/1.0"
2688 but some servers might behave incorrectly in HTTP 1.0, so turning
2689 it to HTTP/1.1 may sometimes help. Note that the Host field is
2690 mandatory in HTTP/1.1, and as a trick, it is possible to pass it
2691 after "\r\n" following the version string.
2692
2693 By default, server health checks only consist in trying to establish a TCP
2694 connection. When "option httpchk" is specified, a complete HTTP request is
2695 sent once the TCP connection is established, and responses 2xx and 3xx are
2696 considered valid, while all other ones indicate a server failure, including
2697 the lack of any response.
2698
2699 The port and interval are specified in the server configuration.
2700
2701 This option does not necessarily require an HTTP backend, it also works with
2702 plain TCP backends. This is particularly useful to check simple scripts bound
2703 to some dedicated ports using the inetd daemon.
2704
2705 Examples :
2706 # Relay HTTPS traffic to Apache instance and check service availability
2707 # using HTTP request "OPTIONS * HTTP/1.1" on port 80.
2708 backend https_relay
2709 mode tcp
Willy Tarreauebaf21a2008-03-21 20:17:14 +01002710 option httpchk OPTIONS * HTTP/1.1\r\nHost:\ www
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002711 server apache1 192.168.1.1:443 check port 80
2712
Hervé COMMOWICK698ae002010-01-12 09:25:13 +01002713 See also : "option ssl-hello-chk", "option smtpchk", "option mysql-check",
2714 "http-check" and the "check", "port" and "interval" server options.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002715
2716
Willy Tarreaub608feb2010-01-02 22:47:18 +01002717option http-server-close
2718no option http-server-close
2719 Enable or disable HTTP connection closing on the server side
2720 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2721 yes | yes | yes | yes
2722 Arguments : none
2723
2724 This mode enables HTTP connection-close mode on the server side while keeping
2725 the ability to support HTTP keep-alive and pipelining on the client side.
2726 This provides the lowest latency on the client side (slow network) and the
2727 fastest session reuse on the server side to save server resources, similarly
2728 to "option forceclose". It also permits non-keepalive capable servers to be
2729 served in keep-alive mode to the clients if they conform to the requirements
2730 of RFC2616.
2731
2732 At the moment, logs will not indicate whether requests came from the same
2733 session or not. The accept date reported in the logs corresponds to the end
2734 of the previous request, and the request time corresponds to the time spent
2735 waiting for a new request. The keep-alive request time is still bound to the
Willy Tarreaub16a5742010-01-10 14:46:16 +01002736 timeout defined by "timeout http-keep-alive" or "timeout http-request" if
2737 not set.
Willy Tarreaub608feb2010-01-02 22:47:18 +01002738
2739 This option may be set both in a frontend and in a backend. It is enabled if
2740 at least one of the frontend or backend holding a connection has it enabled.
Willy Tarreau0dfdf192010-01-05 11:33:11 +01002741 It is worth noting that "option forceclose" has precedence over "option
2742 http-server-close" and that combining "http-server-close" with "httpclose"
2743 basically achieve the same result as "forceclose".
Willy Tarreaub608feb2010-01-02 22:47:18 +01002744
2745 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2746 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2747
2748 See also : "option forceclose" and "option httpclose"
2749
2750
Willy Tarreau88d349d2010-01-25 12:15:43 +01002751option http-use-proxy-header
2752[no] option http-use-proxy-header
2753 Make use of non-standard Proxy-Connection header instead of Connection
2754 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2755 yes | yes | yes | no
2756 Arguments : none
2757
2758 While RFC2616 explicitly states that HTTP/1.1 agents must use the
2759 Connection header to indicate their wish of persistent or non-persistent
2760 connections, both browsers and proxies ignore this header for proxied
2761 connections and make use of the undocumented, non-standard Proxy-Connection
2762 header instead. The issue begins when trying to put a load balancer between
2763 browsers and such proxies, because there will be a difference between what
2764 haproxy understands and what the client and the proxy agree on.
2765
2766 By setting this option in a frontend, haproxy can automatically switch to use
2767 that non-standard header if it sees proxied requests. A proxied request is
2768 defined here as one where the URI begins with neither a '/' nor a '*'. The
2769 choice of header only affects requests passing through proxies making use of
2770 one of the "httpclose", "forceclose" and "http-server-close" options. Note
2771 that this option can only be specified in a frontend and will affect the
2772 request along its whole life.
2773
Willy Tarreau844a7e72010-01-31 21:46:18 +01002774 Also, when this option is set, a request which requires authentication will
2775 automatically switch to use proxy authentication headers if it is itself a
2776 proxied request. That makes it possible to check or enforce authentication in
2777 front of an existing proxy.
2778
Willy Tarreau88d349d2010-01-25 12:15:43 +01002779 This option should normally never be used, except in front of a proxy.
2780
2781 See also : "option httpclose", "option forceclose" and "option
2782 http-server-close".
2783
2784
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002785option httpclose
2786no option httpclose
2787 Enable or disable passive HTTP connection closing
2788 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2789 yes | yes | yes | yes
2790 Arguments : none
2791
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02002792 As stated in section 1, HAProxy does not yes support the HTTP keep-alive
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002793 mode. So by default, if a client communicates with a server in this mode, it
2794 will only analyze, log, and process the first request of each connection. To
2795 workaround this limitation, it is possible to specify "option httpclose". It
2796 will check if a "Connection: close" header is already set in each direction,
2797 and will add one if missing. Each end should react to this by actively
2798 closing the TCP connection after each transfer, thus resulting in a switch to
2799 the HTTP close mode. Any "Connection" header different from "close" will also
2800 be removed.
2801
2802 It seldom happens that some servers incorrectly ignore this header and do not
Willy Tarreau0dfdf192010-01-05 11:33:11 +01002803 close the connection eventhough they reply "Connection: close". For this
2804 reason, they are not compatible with older HTTP 1.0 browsers. If this happens
2805 it is possible to use the "option forceclose" which actively closes the
2806 request connection once the server responds. Option "forceclose" also
2807 releases the server connection earlier because it does not have to wait for
2808 the client to acknowledge it.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002809
2810 This option may be set both in a frontend and in a backend. It is enabled if
2811 at least one of the frontend or backend holding a connection has it enabled.
2812 If "option forceclose" is specified too, it has precedence over "httpclose".
Willy Tarreau0dfdf192010-01-05 11:33:11 +01002813 If "option http-server-close" is enabled at the same time as "httpclose", it
2814 basically achieves the same result as "option forceclose".
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002815
2816 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2817 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2818
Willy Tarreaub608feb2010-01-02 22:47:18 +01002819 See also : "option forceclose" and "option http-server-close"
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002820
2821
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02002822option httplog [ clf ]
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002823 Enable logging of HTTP request, session state and timers
2824 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2825 yes | yes | yes | yes
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02002826 Arguments :
2827 clf if the "clf" argument is added, then the output format will be
2828 the CLF format instead of HAProxy's default HTTP format. You can
2829 use this when you need to feed HAProxy's logs through a specific
2830 log analyser which only support the CLF format and which is not
2831 extensible.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002832
2833 By default, the log output format is very poor, as it only contains the
2834 source and destination addresses, and the instance name. By specifying
2835 "option httplog", each log line turns into a much richer format including,
2836 but not limited to, the HTTP request, the connection timers, the session
2837 status, the connections numbers, the captured headers and cookies, the
2838 frontend, backend and server name, and of course the source address and
2839 ports.
2840
2841 This option may be set either in the frontend or the backend.
2842
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02002843 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2844 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it. Specifying
2845 only "option httplog" will automatically clear the 'clf' mode if it was set
2846 by default.
2847
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02002848 See also : section 8 about logging.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002849
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02002850
2851option http_proxy
2852no option http_proxy
2853 Enable or disable plain HTTP proxy mode
2854 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2855 yes | yes | yes | yes
2856 Arguments : none
2857
2858 It sometimes happens that people need a pure HTTP proxy which understands
2859 basic proxy requests without caching nor any fancy feature. In this case,
2860 it may be worth setting up an HAProxy instance with the "option http_proxy"
2861 set. In this mode, no server is declared, and the connection is forwarded to
2862 the IP address and port found in the URL after the "http://" scheme.
2863
2864 No host address resolution is performed, so this only works when pure IP
2865 addresses are passed. Since this option's usage perimeter is rather limited,
2866 it will probably be used only by experts who know they need exactly it. Last,
2867 if the clients are susceptible of sending keep-alive requests, it will be
2868 needed to add "option http_close" to ensure that all requests will correctly
2869 be analyzed.
2870
2871 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2872 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2873
2874 Example :
2875 # this backend understands HTTP proxy requests and forwards them directly.
2876 backend direct_forward
2877 option httpclose
2878 option http_proxy
2879
2880 See also : "option httpclose"
2881
Willy Tarreau211ad242009-10-03 21:45:07 +02002882
Willy Tarreauf27b5ea2009-10-03 22:01:18 +02002883option independant-streams
2884no option independant-streams
2885 Enable or disable independant timeout processing for both directions
2886 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2887 yes | yes | yes | yes
2888 Arguments : none
2889
2890 By default, when data is sent over a socket, both the write timeout and the
2891 read timeout for that socket are refreshed, because we consider that there is
2892 activity on that socket, and we have no other means of guessing if we should
2893 receive data or not.
2894
2895 While this default behaviour is desirable for almost all applications, there
2896 exists a situation where it is desirable to disable it, and only refresh the
2897 read timeout if there are incoming data. This happens on sessions with large
2898 timeouts and low amounts of exchanged data such as telnet session. If the
2899 server suddenly disappears, the output data accumulates in the system's
2900 socket buffers, both timeouts are correctly refreshed, and there is no way
2901 to know the server does not receive them, so we don't timeout. However, when
2902 the underlying protocol always echoes sent data, it would be enough by itself
2903 to detect the issue using the read timeout. Note that this problem does not
2904 happen with more verbose protocols because data won't accumulate long in the
2905 socket buffers.
2906
2907 When this option is set on the frontend, it will disable read timeout updates
2908 on data sent to the client. There probably is little use of this case. When
2909 the option is set on the backend, it will disable read timeout updates on
2910 data sent to the server. Doing so will typically break large HTTP posts from
2911 slow lines, so use it with caution.
2912
2913 See also : "timeout client" and "timeout server"
2914
2915
Willy Tarreau211ad242009-10-03 21:45:07 +02002916option log-health-checks
2917no option log-health-checks
2918 Enable or disable logging of health checks
2919 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2920 yes | no | yes | yes
2921 Arguments : none
2922
2923 Enable health checks logging so it possible to check for example what
2924 was happening before a server crash. Failed health check are logged if
2925 server is UP and succeeded health checks if server is DOWN, so the amount
2926 of additional information is limited.
2927
2928 If health check logging is enabled no health check status is printed
2929 when servers is set up UP/DOWN/ENABLED/DISABLED.
2930
2931 See also: "log" and section 8 about logging.
2932
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02002933
2934option log-separate-errors
2935no option log-separate-errors
2936 Change log level for non-completely successful connections
2937 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2938 yes | yes | yes | no
2939 Arguments : none
2940
2941 Sometimes looking for errors in logs is not easy. This option makes haproxy
2942 raise the level of logs containing potentially interesting information such
2943 as errors, timeouts, retries, redispatches, or HTTP status codes 5xx. The
2944 level changes from "info" to "err". This makes it possible to log them
2945 separately to a different file with most syslog daemons. Be careful not to
2946 remove them from the original file, otherwise you would lose ordering which
2947 provides very important information.
2948
2949 Using this option, large sites dealing with several thousand connections per
2950 second may log normal traffic to a rotating buffer and only archive smaller
2951 error logs.
2952
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02002953 See also : "log", "dontlognull", "dontlog-normal" and section 8 about
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02002954 logging.
2955
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002956
2957option logasap
2958no option logasap
2959 Enable or disable early logging of HTTP requests
2960 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2961 yes | yes | yes | no
2962 Arguments : none
2963
2964 By default, HTTP requests are logged upon termination so that the total
2965 transfer time and the number of bytes appear in the logs. When large objects
2966 are being transferred, it may take a while before the request appears in the
2967 logs. Using "option logasap", the request gets logged as soon as the server
2968 sends the complete headers. The only missing information in the logs will be
2969 the total number of bytes which will indicate everything except the amount
2970 of data transferred, and the total time which will not take the transfer
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01002971 time into account. In such a situation, it's a good practice to capture the
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002972 "Content-Length" response header so that the logs at least indicate how many
2973 bytes are expected to be transferred.
2974
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01002975 Examples :
2976 listen http_proxy 0.0.0.0:80
2977 mode http
2978 option httplog
2979 option logasap
2980 log 192.168.2.200 local3
2981
2982 >>> Feb 6 12:14:14 localhost \
2983 haproxy[14389]: 10.0.1.2:33317 [06/Feb/2009:12:14:14.655] http-in \
2984 static/srv1 9/10/7/14/+30 200 +243 - - ---- 3/1/1/1/0 1/0 \
2985 "GET /image.iso HTTP/1.0"
2986
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02002987 See also : "option httplog", "capture response header", and section 8 about
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002988 logging.
2989
2990
Hervé COMMOWICK698ae002010-01-12 09:25:13 +01002991option mysql-check
2992 Use Mysql health checks for server testing
2993 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2994 yes | no | yes | yes
2995 Arguments : none
2996
2997 The check consists in parsing Mysql Handshake Initialisation packet or Error
2998 packet, which is sent by MySQL server on connect. It is a basic but useful
2999 test which does not produce any logging on the server. However, it does not
3000 check database presence nor database consistency, nor user permission to
3001 access. To do this, you can use an external check with xinetd for example.
3002
3003 Most often, an incoming MySQL server needs to see the client's IP address for
3004 various purposes, including IP privilege matching and connection logging.
3005 When possible, it is often wise to masquerade the client's IP address when
3006 connecting to the server using the "usesrc" argument of the "source" keyword,
3007 which requires the cttproxy feature to be compiled in, and the MySQL server
3008 to route the client via the machine hosting haproxy.
3009
3010 See also: "option httpchk"
3011
3012
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003013option nolinger
3014no option nolinger
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01003015 Enable or disable immediate session resource cleaning after close
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003016 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3017 yes | yes | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003018 Arguments : none
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003019
3020 When clients or servers abort connections in a dirty way (eg: they are
3021 physically disconnected), the session timeouts triggers and the session is
3022 closed. But it will remain in FIN_WAIT1 state for some time in the system,
3023 using some resources and possibly limiting the ability to establish newer
3024 connections.
3025
3026 When this happens, it is possible to activate "option nolinger" which forces
3027 the system to immediately remove any socket's pending data on close. Thus,
3028 the session is instantly purged from the system's tables. This usually has
3029 side effects such as increased number of TCP resets due to old retransmits
3030 getting immediately rejected. Some firewalls may sometimes complain about
3031 this too.
3032
3033 For this reason, it is not recommended to use this option when not absolutely
3034 needed. You know that you need it when you have thousands of FIN_WAIT1
3035 sessions on your system (TIME_WAIT ones do not count).
3036
3037 This option may be used both on frontends and backends, depending on the side
3038 where it is required. Use it on the frontend for clients, and on the backend
3039 for servers.
3040
3041 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3042 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3043
3044
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02003045option originalto [ except <network> ] [ header <name> ]
3046 Enable insertion of the X-Original-To header to requests sent to servers
3047 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3048 yes | yes | yes | yes
3049 Arguments :
3050 <network> is an optional argument used to disable this option for sources
3051 matching <network>
3052 <name> an optional argument to specify a different "X-Original-To"
3053 header name.
3054
3055 Since HAProxy can work in transparent mode, every request from a client can
3056 be redirected to the proxy and HAProxy itself can proxy every request to a
3057 complex SQUID environment and the destination host from SO_ORIGINAL_DST will
3058 be lost. This is annoying when you want access rules based on destination ip
3059 addresses. To solve this problem, a new HTTP header "X-Original-To" may be
3060 added by HAProxy to all requests sent to the server. This header contains a
3061 value representing the original destination IP address. Since this must be
3062 configured to always use the last occurrence of this header only. Note that
3063 only the last occurrence of the header must be used, since it is really
3064 possible that the client has already brought one.
3065
3066 The keyword "header" may be used to supply a different header name to replace
3067 the default "X-Original-To". This can be useful where you might already
3068 have a "X-Original-To" header from a different application, and you need
3069 preserve it. Also if your backend server doesn't use the "X-Original-To"
3070 header and requires different one.
3071
3072 Sometimes, a same HAProxy instance may be shared between a direct client
3073 access and a reverse-proxy access (for instance when an SSL reverse-proxy is
3074 used to decrypt HTTPS traffic). It is possible to disable the addition of the
3075 header for a known source address or network by adding the "except" keyword
3076 followed by the network address. In this case, any source IP matching the
3077 network will not cause an addition of this header. Most common uses are with
3078 private networks or 127.0.0.1.
3079
3080 This option may be specified either in the frontend or in the backend. If at
3081 least one of them uses it, the header will be added. Note that the backend's
3082 setting of the header subargument takes precedence over the frontend's if
3083 both are defined.
3084
3085 It is important to note that as long as HAProxy does not support keep-alive
3086 connections, only the first request of a connection will receive the header.
3087 For this reason, it is important to ensure that "option httpclose" is set
3088 when using this option.
3089
3090 Examples :
3091 # Original Destination address
3092 frontend www
3093 mode http
3094 option originalto except 127.0.0.1
3095
3096 # Those servers want the IP Address in X-Client-Dst
3097 backend www
3098 mode http
3099 option originalto header X-Client-Dst
3100
3101 See also : "option httpclose"
3102
3103
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003104option persist
3105no option persist
3106 Enable or disable forced persistence on down servers
3107 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3108 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003109 Arguments : none
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003110
3111 When an HTTP request reaches a backend with a cookie which references a dead
3112 server, by default it is redispatched to another server. It is possible to
3113 force the request to be sent to the dead server first using "option persist"
3114 if absolutely needed. A common use case is when servers are under extreme
3115 load and spend their time flapping. In this case, the users would still be
3116 directed to the server they opened the session on, in the hope they would be
3117 correctly served. It is recommended to use "option redispatch" in conjunction
3118 with this option so that in the event it would not be possible to connect to
3119 the server at all (server definitely dead), the client would finally be
3120 redirected to another valid server.
3121
3122 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3123 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3124
Willy Tarreau4de91492010-01-22 19:10:05 +01003125 See also : "option redispatch", "retries", "force-persist"
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003126
3127
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003128option redispatch
3129no option redispatch
3130 Enable or disable session redistribution in case of connection failure
3131 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3132 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003133 Arguments : none
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003134
3135 In HTTP mode, if a server designated by a cookie is down, clients may
3136 definitely stick to it because they cannot flush the cookie, so they will not
3137 be able to access the service anymore.
3138
3139 Specifying "option redispatch" will allow the proxy to break their
3140 persistence and redistribute them to a working server.
3141
3142 It also allows to retry last connection to another server in case of multiple
3143 connection failures. Of course, it requires having "retries" set to a nonzero
3144 value.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003145
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003146 This form is the preferred form, which replaces both the "redispatch" and
3147 "redisp" keywords.
3148
3149 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3150 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3151
Willy Tarreau4de91492010-01-22 19:10:05 +01003152 See also : "redispatch", "retries", "force-persist"
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003153
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003154
3155option smtpchk
3156option smtpchk <hello> <domain>
3157 Use SMTP health checks for server testing
3158 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3159 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003160 Arguments :
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003161 <hello> is an optional argument. It is the "hello" command to use. It can
3162 be either "HELO" (for SMTP) or "EHLO" (for ESTMP). All other
3163 values will be turned into the default command ("HELO").
3164
3165 <domain> is the domain name to present to the server. It may only be
3166 specified (and is mandatory) if the hello command has been
3167 specified. By default, "localhost" is used.
3168
3169 When "option smtpchk" is set, the health checks will consist in TCP
3170 connections followed by an SMTP command. By default, this command is
3171 "HELO localhost". The server's return code is analyzed and only return codes
3172 starting with a "2" will be considered as valid. All other responses,
3173 including a lack of response will constitute an error and will indicate a
3174 dead server.
3175
3176 This test is meant to be used with SMTP servers or relays. Depending on the
3177 request, it is possible that some servers do not log each connection attempt,
3178 so you may want to experiment to improve the behaviour. Using telnet on port
3179 25 is often easier than adjusting the configuration.
3180
3181 Most often, an incoming SMTP server needs to see the client's IP address for
3182 various purposes, including spam filtering, anti-spoofing and logging. When
3183 possible, it is often wise to masquerade the client's IP address when
3184 connecting to the server using the "usesrc" argument of the "source" keyword,
3185 which requires the cttproxy feature to be compiled in.
3186
3187 Example :
3188 option smtpchk HELO mydomain.org
3189
3190 See also : "option httpchk", "source"
3191
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003192
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiaeebf9b2009-10-04 15:43:17 +02003193option socket-stats
3194no option socket-stats
3195
3196 Enable or disable collecting & providing separate statistics for each socket.
3197 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3198 yes | yes | yes | no
3199
3200 Arguments : none
3201
3202
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +01003203option splice-auto
3204no option splice-auto
3205 Enable or disable automatic kernel acceleration on sockets in both directions
3206 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3207 yes | yes | yes | yes
3208 Arguments : none
3209
3210 When this option is enabled either on a frontend or on a backend, haproxy
3211 will automatically evaluate the opportunity to use kernel tcp splicing to
3212 forward data between the client and the server, in either direction. Haproxy
3213 uses heuristics to estimate if kernel splicing might improve performance or
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01003214 not. Both directions are handled independently. Note that the heuristics used
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +01003215 are not much aggressive in order to limit excessive use of splicing. This
3216 option requires splicing to be enabled at compile time, and may be globally
3217 disabled with the global option "nosplice". Since splice uses pipes, using it
3218 requires that there are enough spare pipes.
3219
3220 Important note: kernel-based TCP splicing is a Linux-specific feature which
3221 first appeared in kernel 2.6.25. It offers kernel-based acceleration to
3222 transfer data between sockets without copying these data to user-space, thus
3223 providing noticeable performance gains and CPU cycles savings. Since many
3224 early implementations are buggy, corrupt data and/or are inefficient, this
3225 feature is not enabled by default, and it should be used with extreme care.
3226 While it is not possible to detect the correctness of an implementation,
3227 2.6.29 is the first version offering a properly working implementation. In
3228 case of doubt, splicing may be globally disabled using the global "nosplice"
3229 keyword.
3230
3231 Example :
3232 option splice-auto
3233
3234 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3235 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3236
3237 See also : "option splice-request", "option splice-response", and global
3238 options "nosplice" and "maxpipes"
3239
3240
3241option splice-request
3242no option splice-request
3243 Enable or disable automatic kernel acceleration on sockets for requests
3244 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3245 yes | yes | yes | yes
3246 Arguments : none
3247
3248 When this option is enabled either on a frontend or on a backend, haproxy
3249 will user kernel tcp splicing whenever possible to forward data going from
3250 the client to the server. It might still use the recv/send scheme if there
3251 are no spare pipes left. This option requires splicing to be enabled at
3252 compile time, and may be globally disabled with the global option "nosplice".
3253 Since splice uses pipes, using it requires that there are enough spare pipes.
3254
3255 Important note: see "option splice-auto" for usage limitations.
3256
3257 Example :
3258 option splice-request
3259
3260 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3261 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3262
3263 See also : "option splice-auto", "option splice-response", and global options
3264 "nosplice" and "maxpipes"
3265
3266
3267option splice-response
3268no option splice-response
3269 Enable or disable automatic kernel acceleration on sockets for responses
3270 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3271 yes | yes | yes | yes
3272 Arguments : none
3273
3274 When this option is enabled either on a frontend or on a backend, haproxy
3275 will user kernel tcp splicing whenever possible to forward data going from
3276 the server to the client. It might still use the recv/send scheme if there
3277 are no spare pipes left. This option requires splicing to be enabled at
3278 compile time, and may be globally disabled with the global option "nosplice".
3279 Since splice uses pipes, using it requires that there are enough spare pipes.
3280
3281 Important note: see "option splice-auto" for usage limitations.
3282
3283 Example :
3284 option splice-response
3285
3286 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3287 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3288
3289 See also : "option splice-auto", "option splice-request", and global options
3290 "nosplice" and "maxpipes"
3291
3292
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01003293option srvtcpka
3294no option srvtcpka
3295 Enable or disable the sending of TCP keepalive packets on the server side
3296 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3297 yes | no | yes | yes
3298 Arguments : none
3299
3300 When there is a firewall or any session-aware component between a client and
3301 a server, and when the protocol involves very long sessions with long idle
3302 periods (eg: remote desktops), there is a risk that one of the intermediate
3303 components decides to expire a session which has remained idle for too long.
3304
3305 Enabling socket-level TCP keep-alives makes the system regularly send packets
3306 to the other end of the connection, leaving it active. The delay between
3307 keep-alive probes is controlled by the system only and depends both on the
3308 operating system and its tuning parameters.
3309
3310 It is important to understand that keep-alive packets are neither emitted nor
3311 received at the application level. It is only the network stacks which sees
3312 them. For this reason, even if one side of the proxy already uses keep-alives
3313 to maintain its connection alive, those keep-alive packets will not be
3314 forwarded to the other side of the proxy.
3315
3316 Please note that this has nothing to do with HTTP keep-alive.
3317
3318 Using option "srvtcpka" enables the emission of TCP keep-alive probes on the
3319 server side of a connection, which should help when session expirations are
3320 noticed between HAProxy and a server.
3321
3322 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3323 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3324
3325 See also : "option clitcpka", "option tcpka"
3326
3327
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003328option ssl-hello-chk
3329 Use SSLv3 client hello health checks for server testing
3330 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3331 yes | no | yes | yes
3332 Arguments : none
3333
3334 When some SSL-based protocols are relayed in TCP mode through HAProxy, it is
3335 possible to test that the server correctly talks SSL instead of just testing
3336 that it accepts the TCP connection. When "option ssl-hello-chk" is set, pure
3337 SSLv3 client hello messages are sent once the connection is established to
3338 the server, and the response is analyzed to find an SSL server hello message.
3339 The server is considered valid only when the response contains this server
3340 hello message.
3341
3342 All servers tested till there correctly reply to SSLv3 client hello messages,
3343 and most servers tested do not even log the requests containing only hello
3344 messages, which is appreciable.
3345
3346 See also: "option httpchk"
3347
3348
Willy Tarreau9ea05a72009-06-14 12:07:01 +02003349option tcp-smart-accept
3350no option tcp-smart-accept
3351 Enable or disable the saving of one ACK packet during the accept sequence
3352 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3353 yes | yes | yes | no
3354 Arguments : none
3355
3356 When an HTTP connection request comes in, the system acknowledges it on
3357 behalf of HAProxy, then the client immediately sends its request, and the
3358 system acknowledges it too while it is notifying HAProxy about the new
3359 connection. HAProxy then reads the request and responds. This means that we
3360 have one TCP ACK sent by the system for nothing, because the request could
3361 very well be acknowledged by HAProxy when it sends its response.
3362
3363 For this reason, in HTTP mode, HAProxy automatically asks the system to avoid
3364 sending this useless ACK on platforms which support it (currently at least
3365 Linux). It must not cause any problem, because the system will send it anyway
3366 after 40 ms if the response takes more time than expected to come.
3367
3368 During complex network debugging sessions, it may be desirable to disable
3369 this optimization because delayed ACKs can make troubleshooting more complex
3370 when trying to identify where packets are delayed. It is then possible to
3371 fall back to normal behaviour by specifying "no option tcp-smart-accept".
3372
3373 It is also possible to force it for non-HTTP proxies by simply specifying
3374 "option tcp-smart-accept". For instance, it can make sense with some services
3375 such as SMTP where the server speaks first.
3376
3377 It is recommended to avoid forcing this option in a defaults section. In case
3378 of doubt, consider setting it back to automatic values by prepending the
3379 "default" keyword before it, or disabling it using the "no" keyword.
3380
Willy Tarreaud88edf22009-06-14 15:48:17 +02003381 See also : "option tcp-smart-connect"
3382
3383
3384option tcp-smart-connect
3385no option tcp-smart-connect
3386 Enable or disable the saving of one ACK packet during the connect sequence
3387 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3388 yes | no | yes | yes
3389 Arguments : none
3390
3391 On certain systems (at least Linux), HAProxy can ask the kernel not to
3392 immediately send an empty ACK upon a connection request, but to directly
3393 send the buffer request instead. This saves one packet on the network and
3394 thus boosts performance. It can also be useful for some servers, because they
3395 immediately get the request along with the incoming connection.
3396
3397 This feature is enabled when "option tcp-smart-connect" is set in a backend.
3398 It is not enabled by default because it makes network troubleshooting more
3399 complex.
3400
3401 It only makes sense to enable it with protocols where the client speaks first
3402 such as HTTP. In other situations, if there is no data to send in place of
3403 the ACK, a normal ACK is sent.
3404
3405 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3406 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3407
3408 See also : "option tcp-smart-accept"
3409
Willy Tarreau9ea05a72009-06-14 12:07:01 +02003410
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01003411option tcpka
3412 Enable or disable the sending of TCP keepalive packets on both sides
3413 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3414 yes | yes | yes | yes
3415 Arguments : none
3416
3417 When there is a firewall or any session-aware component between a client and
3418 a server, and when the protocol involves very long sessions with long idle
3419 periods (eg: remote desktops), there is a risk that one of the intermediate
3420 components decides to expire a session which has remained idle for too long.
3421
3422 Enabling socket-level TCP keep-alives makes the system regularly send packets
3423 to the other end of the connection, leaving it active. The delay between
3424 keep-alive probes is controlled by the system only and depends both on the
3425 operating system and its tuning parameters.
3426
3427 It is important to understand that keep-alive packets are neither emitted nor
3428 received at the application level. It is only the network stacks which sees
3429 them. For this reason, even if one side of the proxy already uses keep-alives
3430 to maintain its connection alive, those keep-alive packets will not be
3431 forwarded to the other side of the proxy.
3432
3433 Please note that this has nothing to do with HTTP keep-alive.
3434
3435 Using option "tcpka" enables the emission of TCP keep-alive probes on both
3436 the client and server sides of a connection. Note that this is meaningful
3437 only in "defaults" or "listen" sections. If this option is used in a
3438 frontend, only the client side will get keep-alives, and if this option is
3439 used in a backend, only the server side will get keep-alives. For this
3440 reason, it is strongly recommended to explicitly use "option clitcpka" and
3441 "option srvtcpka" when the configuration is split between frontends and
3442 backends.
3443
3444 See also : "option clitcpka", "option srvtcpka"
3445
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003446
3447option tcplog
3448 Enable advanced logging of TCP connections with session state and timers
3449 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3450 yes | yes | yes | yes
3451 Arguments : none
3452
3453 By default, the log output format is very poor, as it only contains the
3454 source and destination addresses, and the instance name. By specifying
3455 "option tcplog", each log line turns into a much richer format including, but
3456 not limited to, the connection timers, the session status, the connections
3457 numbers, the frontend, backend and server name, and of course the source
3458 address and ports. This option is useful for pure TCP proxies in order to
3459 find which of the client or server disconnects or times out. For normal HTTP
3460 proxies, it's better to use "option httplog" which is even more complete.
3461
3462 This option may be set either in the frontend or the backend.
3463
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003464 See also : "option httplog", and section 8 about logging.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003465
3466
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003467option transparent
3468no option transparent
3469 Enable client-side transparent proxying
3470 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreau4b1f8592008-12-23 23:13:55 +01003471 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003472 Arguments : none
3473
3474 This option was introduced in order to provide layer 7 persistence to layer 3
3475 load balancers. The idea is to use the OS's ability to redirect an incoming
3476 connection for a remote address to a local process (here HAProxy), and let
3477 this process know what address was initially requested. When this option is
3478 used, sessions without cookies will be forwarded to the original destination
3479 IP address of the incoming request (which should match that of another
3480 equipment), while requests with cookies will still be forwarded to the
3481 appropriate server.
3482
3483 Note that contrary to a common belief, this option does NOT make HAProxy
3484 present the client's IP to the server when establishing the connection.
3485
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003486 See also: the "usersrc" argument of the "source" keyword, and the
3487 "transparent" option of the "bind" keyword.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003488
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01003489
Emeric Brun647caf12009-06-30 17:57:00 +02003490persist rdp-cookie
3491persist rdp-cookie(name)
3492 Enable RDP cookie-based persistence
3493 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3494 yes | no | yes | yes
3495 Arguments :
3496 <name> is the optional name of the RDP cookie to check. If omitted, the
3497 default cookie name "mstshash" will be used. There currently is
3498 no valid reason to change this name.
3499
3500 This statement enables persistence based on an RDP cookie. The RDP cookie
3501 contains all information required to find the server in the list of known
3502 servers. So when this option is set in the backend, the request is analysed
3503 and if an RDP cookie is found, it is decoded. If it matches a known server
3504 which is still UP (or if "option persist" is set), then the connection is
3505 forwarded to this server.
3506
3507 Note that this only makes sense in a TCP backend, but for this to work, the
3508 frontend must have waited long enough to ensure that an RDP cookie is present
3509 in the request buffer. This is the same requirement as with the "rdp-cookie"
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01003510 load-balancing method. Thus it is highly recommended to put all statements in
Emeric Brun647caf12009-06-30 17:57:00 +02003511 a single "listen" section.
3512
3513 Example :
3514 listen tse-farm
3515 bind :3389
3516 # wait up to 5s for an RDP cookie in the request
3517 tcp-request inspect-delay 5s
3518 tcp-request content accept if RDP_COOKIE
3519 # apply RDP cookie persistence
3520 persist rdp-cookie
3521 # if server is unknown, let's balance on the same cookie.
3522 # alternatively, "balance leastconn" may be useful too.
3523 balance rdp-cookie
3524 server srv1 1.1.1.1:3389
3525 server srv2 1.1.1.2:3389
3526
3527 See also : "balance rdp-cookie", "tcp-request" and the "req_rdp_cookie" ACL.
3528
3529
Willy Tarreau3a7d2072009-03-05 23:48:25 +01003530rate-limit sessions <rate>
3531 Set a limit on the number of new sessions accepted per second on a frontend
3532 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3533 yes | yes | yes | no
3534 Arguments :
3535 <rate> The <rate> parameter is an integer designating the maximum number
3536 of new sessions per second to accept on the frontend.
3537
3538 When the frontend reaches the specified number of new sessions per second, it
3539 stops accepting new connections until the rate drops below the limit again.
3540 During this time, the pending sessions will be kept in the socket's backlog
3541 (in system buffers) and haproxy will not even be aware that sessions are
3542 pending. When applying very low limit on a highly loaded service, it may make
3543 sense to increase the socket's backlog using the "backlog" keyword.
3544
3545 This feature is particularly efficient at blocking connection-based attacks
3546 or service abuse on fragile servers. Since the session rate is measured every
3547 millisecond, it is extremely accurate. Also, the limit applies immediately,
3548 no delay is needed at all to detect the threshold.
3549
3550 Example : limit the connection rate on SMTP to 10 per second max
3551 listen smtp
3552 mode tcp
3553 bind :25
3554 rate-limit sessions 10
3555 server 127.0.0.1:1025
3556
3557 Note : when the maximum rate is reached, the frontend's status appears as
3558 "FULL" in the statistics, exactly as when it is saturated.
3559
3560 See also : the "backlog" keyword and the "fe_sess_rate" ACL criterion.
3561
3562
Willy Tarreauf285f542010-01-03 20:03:03 +01003563redirect location <to> [code <code>] <option> [{if | unless} <condition>]
3564redirect prefix <to> [code <code>] <option> [{if | unless} <condition>]
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003565 Return an HTTP redirection if/unless a condition is matched
3566 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3567 no | yes | yes | yes
3568
3569 If/unless the condition is matched, the HTTP request will lead to a redirect
Willy Tarreauf285f542010-01-03 20:03:03 +01003570 response. If no condition is specified, the redirect applies unconditionally.
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003571
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003572 Arguments :
3573 <to> With "redirect location", the exact value in <to> is placed into
3574 the HTTP "Location" header. In case of "redirect prefix", the
3575 "Location" header is built from the concatenation of <to> and the
3576 complete URI, including the query string, unless the "drop-query"
Willy Tarreaufe651a52008-11-19 21:15:17 +01003577 option is specified (see below). As a special case, if <to>
3578 equals exactly "/" in prefix mode, then nothing is inserted
3579 before the original URI. It allows one to redirect to the same
3580 URL.
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003581
3582 <code> The code is optional. It indicates which type of HTTP redirection
3583 is desired. Only codes 301, 302 and 303 are supported, and 302 is
3584 used if no code is specified. 301 means "Moved permanently", and
3585 a browser may cache the Location. 302 means "Moved permanently"
3586 and means that the browser should not cache the redirection. 303
3587 is equivalent to 302 except that the browser will fetch the
3588 location with a GET method.
3589
3590 <option> There are several options which can be specified to adjust the
3591 expected behaviour of a redirection :
3592
3593 - "drop-query"
3594 When this keyword is used in a prefix-based redirection, then the
3595 location will be set without any possible query-string, which is useful
3596 for directing users to a non-secure page for instance. It has no effect
3597 with a location-type redirect.
3598
Willy Tarreau81e3b4f2010-01-10 00:42:19 +01003599 - "append-slash"
3600 This keyword may be used in conjunction with "drop-query" to redirect
3601 users who use a URL not ending with a '/' to the same one with the '/'.
3602 It can be useful to ensure that search engines will only see one URL.
3603 For this, a return code 301 is preferred.
3604
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003605 - "set-cookie NAME[=value]"
3606 A "Set-Cookie" header will be added with NAME (and optionally "=value")
3607 to the response. This is sometimes used to indicate that a user has
3608 been seen, for instance to protect against some types of DoS. No other
3609 cookie option is added, so the cookie will be a session cookie. Note
3610 that for a browser, a sole cookie name without an equal sign is
3611 different from a cookie with an equal sign.
3612
3613 - "clear-cookie NAME[=]"
3614 A "Set-Cookie" header will be added with NAME (and optionally "="), but
3615 with the "Max-Age" attribute set to zero. This will tell the browser to
3616 delete this cookie. It is useful for instance on logout pages. It is
3617 important to note that clearing the cookie "NAME" will not remove a
3618 cookie set with "NAME=value". You have to clear the cookie "NAME=" for
3619 that, because the browser makes the difference.
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003620
3621 Example: move the login URL only to HTTPS.
3622 acl clear dst_port 80
3623 acl secure dst_port 8080
3624 acl login_page url_beg /login
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003625 acl logout url_beg /logout
Willy Tarreau79da4692008-11-19 20:03:04 +01003626 acl uid_given url_reg /login?userid=[^&]+
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003627 acl cookie_set hdr_sub(cookie) SEEN=1
3628
3629 redirect prefix https://mysite.com set-cookie SEEN=1 if !cookie_set
Willy Tarreau79da4692008-11-19 20:03:04 +01003630 redirect prefix https://mysite.com if login_page !secure
3631 redirect prefix http://mysite.com drop-query if login_page !uid_given
3632 redirect location http://mysite.com/ if !login_page secure
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003633 redirect location / clear-cookie USERID= if logout
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003634
Willy Tarreau81e3b4f2010-01-10 00:42:19 +01003635 Example: send redirects for request for articles without a '/'.
3636 acl missing_slash path_reg ^/article/[^/]*$
3637 redirect code 301 prefix / drop-query append-slash if missing_slash
3638
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003639 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003640
3641
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003642redisp (deprecated)
3643redispatch (deprecated)
3644 Enable or disable session redistribution in case of connection failure
3645 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3646 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003647 Arguments : none
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003648
3649 In HTTP mode, if a server designated by a cookie is down, clients may
3650 definitely stick to it because they cannot flush the cookie, so they will not
3651 be able to access the service anymore.
3652
3653 Specifying "redispatch" will allow the proxy to break their persistence and
3654 redistribute them to a working server.
3655
3656 It also allows to retry last connection to another server in case of multiple
3657 connection failures. Of course, it requires having "retries" set to a nonzero
3658 value.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003659
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003660 This form is deprecated, do not use it in any new configuration, use the new
3661 "option redispatch" instead.
3662
3663 See also : "option redispatch"
3664
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003665
Willy Tarreau8abd4cd2010-01-31 14:30:44 +01003666reqadd <string> [{if | unless} <cond>]
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003667 Add a header at the end of the HTTP request
3668 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3669 no | yes | yes | yes
3670 Arguments :
3671 <string> is the complete line to be added. Any space or known delimiter
3672 must be escaped using a backslash ('\'). Please refer to section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003673 6 about HTTP header manipulation for more information.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003674
Willy Tarreau8abd4cd2010-01-31 14:30:44 +01003675 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3676 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3677
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003678 A new line consisting in <string> followed by a line feed will be added after
3679 the last header of an HTTP request.
3680
3681 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
3682 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
3683 responses.
3684
Willy Tarreau8abd4cd2010-01-31 14:30:44 +01003685 Example : add "X-Proto: SSL" to requests coming via port 81
3686 acl is-ssl dst_port 81
3687 reqadd X-Proto:\ SSL if is-ssl
3688
3689 See also: "rspadd", section 6 about HTTP header manipulation, and section 7
3690 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003691
3692
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003693reqallow <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3694reqiallow <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003695 Definitely allow an HTTP request if a line matches a regular expression
3696 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3697 no | yes | yes | yes
3698 Arguments :
3699 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3700 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3701 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3702 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3703 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The
3704 "reqallow" keyword strictly matches case while "reqiallow"
3705 ignores case.
3706
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003707 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3708 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3709
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003710 A request containing any line which matches extended regular expression
3711 <search> will mark the request as allowed, even if any later test would
3712 result in a deny. The test applies both to the request line and to request
3713 headers. Keep in mind that URLs in request line are case-sensitive while
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003714 header names are not.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003715
3716 It is easier, faster and more powerful to use ACLs to write access policies.
3717 Reqdeny, reqallow and reqpass should be avoided in new designs.
3718
3719 Example :
3720 # allow www.* but refuse *.local
3721 reqiallow ^Host:\ www\.
3722 reqideny ^Host:\ .*\.local
3723
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003724 See also: "reqdeny", "block", section 6 about HTTP header manipulation, and
3725 section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003726
3727
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003728reqdel <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3729reqidel <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003730 Delete all headers matching a regular expression in an HTTP request
3731 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3732 no | yes | yes | yes
3733 Arguments :
3734 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3735 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3736 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3737 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3738 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The "reqdel"
3739 keyword strictly matches case while "reqidel" ignores case.
3740
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003741 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3742 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3743
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003744 Any header line matching extended regular expression <search> in the request
3745 will be completely deleted. Most common use of this is to remove unwanted
3746 and/or dangerous headers or cookies from a request before passing it to the
3747 next servers.
3748
3749 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
3750 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
3751 responses. Keep in mind that header names are not case-sensitive.
3752
3753 Example :
3754 # remove X-Forwarded-For header and SERVER cookie
3755 reqidel ^X-Forwarded-For:.*
3756 reqidel ^Cookie:.*SERVER=
3757
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003758 See also: "reqadd", "reqrep", "rspdel", section 6 about HTTP header
3759 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003760
3761
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003762reqdeny <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3763reqideny <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003764 Deny an HTTP request if a line matches a regular expression
3765 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3766 no | yes | yes | yes
3767 Arguments :
3768 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3769 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3770 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3771 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3772 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The
3773 "reqdeny" keyword strictly matches case while "reqideny" ignores
3774 case.
3775
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003776 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3777 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3778
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003779 A request containing any line which matches extended regular expression
3780 <search> will mark the request as denied, even if any later test would
3781 result in an allow. The test applies both to the request line and to request
3782 headers. Keep in mind that URLs in request line are case-sensitive while
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003783 header names are not.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003784
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01003785 A denied request will generate an "HTTP 403 forbidden" response once the
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01003786 complete request has been parsed. This is consistent with what is practiced
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003787 using ACLs.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01003788
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003789 It is easier, faster and more powerful to use ACLs to write access policies.
3790 Reqdeny, reqallow and reqpass should be avoided in new designs.
3791
3792 Example :
3793 # refuse *.local, then allow www.*
3794 reqideny ^Host:\ .*\.local
3795 reqiallow ^Host:\ www\.
3796
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003797 See also: "reqallow", "rspdeny", "block", section 6 about HTTP header
3798 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003799
3800
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003801reqpass <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3802reqipass <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003803 Ignore any HTTP request line matching a regular expression in next rules
3804 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3805 no | yes | yes | yes
3806 Arguments :
3807 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3808 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3809 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3810 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3811 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The
3812 "reqpass" keyword strictly matches case while "reqipass" ignores
3813 case.
3814
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003815 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3816 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3817
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003818 A request containing any line which matches extended regular expression
3819 <search> will skip next rules, without assigning any deny or allow verdict.
3820 The test applies both to the request line and to request headers. Keep in
3821 mind that URLs in request line are case-sensitive while header names are not.
3822
3823 It is easier, faster and more powerful to use ACLs to write access policies.
3824 Reqdeny, reqallow and reqpass should be avoided in new designs.
3825
3826 Example :
3827 # refuse *.local, then allow www.*, but ignore "www.private.local"
3828 reqipass ^Host:\ www.private\.local
3829 reqideny ^Host:\ .*\.local
3830 reqiallow ^Host:\ www\.
3831
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003832 See also: "reqallow", "reqdeny", "block", section 6 about HTTP header
3833 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003834
3835
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003836reqrep <search> <string> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3837reqirep <search> <string> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003838 Replace a regular expression with a string in an HTTP request line
3839 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3840 no | yes | yes | yes
3841 Arguments :
3842 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3843 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3844 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3845 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3846 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The "reqrep"
3847 keyword strictly matches case while "reqirep" ignores case.
3848
3849 <string> is the complete line to be added. Any space or known delimiter
3850 must be escaped using a backslash ('\'). References to matched
3851 pattern groups are possible using the common \N form, with N
3852 being a single digit between 0 and 9. Please refer to section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003853 6 about HTTP header manipulation for more information.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003854
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003855 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3856 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3857
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003858 Any line matching extended regular expression <search> in the request (both
3859 the request line and header lines) will be completely replaced with <string>.
3860 Most common use of this is to rewrite URLs or domain names in "Host" headers.
3861
3862 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
3863 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
3864 responses. Note that for increased readability, it is suggested to add enough
3865 spaces between the request and the response. Keep in mind that URLs in
3866 request line are case-sensitive while header names are not.
3867
3868 Example :
3869 # replace "/static/" with "/" at the beginning of any request path.
3870 reqrep ^([^\ ]*)\ /static/(.*) \1\ /\2
3871 # replace "www.mydomain.com" with "www" in the host name.
3872 reqirep ^Host:\ www.mydomain.com Host:\ www
3873
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003874 See also: "reqadd", "reqdel", "rsprep", section 6 about HTTP header
3875 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003876
3877
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003878reqtarpit <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3879reqitarpit <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003880 Tarpit an HTTP request containing a line matching a regular expression
3881 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3882 no | yes | yes | yes
3883 Arguments :
3884 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3885 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3886 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3887 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3888 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The
3889 "reqtarpit" keyword strictly matches case while "reqitarpit"
3890 ignores case.
3891
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003892 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3893 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3894
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003895 A request containing any line which matches extended regular expression
3896 <search> will be tarpitted, which means that it will connect to nowhere, will
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01003897 be kept open for a pre-defined time, then will return an HTTP error 500 so
3898 that the attacker does not suspect it has been tarpitted. The status 500 will
3899 be reported in the logs, but the completion flags will indicate "PT". The
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003900 delay is defined by "timeout tarpit", or "timeout connect" if the former is
3901 not set.
3902
3903 The goal of the tarpit is to slow down robots attacking servers with
3904 identifiable requests. Many robots limit their outgoing number of connections
3905 and stay connected waiting for a reply which can take several minutes to
3906 come. Depending on the environment and attack, it may be particularly
3907 efficient at reducing the load on the network and firewalls.
3908
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003909 Examples :
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003910 # ignore user-agents reporting any flavour of "Mozilla" or "MSIE", but
3911 # block all others.
3912 reqipass ^User-Agent:\.*(Mozilla|MSIE)
3913 reqitarpit ^User-Agent:
3914
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003915 # block bad guys
3916 acl badguys src 10.1.0.3 172.16.13.20/28
3917 reqitarpit . if badguys
3918
3919 See also: "reqallow", "reqdeny", "reqpass", section 6 about HTTP header
3920 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003921
3922
Willy Tarreaue5c5ce92008-06-20 17:27:19 +02003923retries <value>
3924 Set the number of retries to perform on a server after a connection failure
3925 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3926 yes | no | yes | yes
3927 Arguments :
3928 <value> is the number of times a connection attempt should be retried on
3929 a server when a connection either is refused or times out. The
3930 default value is 3.
3931
3932 It is important to understand that this value applies to the number of
3933 connection attempts, not full requests. When a connection has effectively
3934 been established to a server, there will be no more retry.
3935
3936 In order to avoid immediate reconnections to a server which is restarting,
3937 a turn-around timer of 1 second is applied before a retry occurs.
3938
3939 When "option redispatch" is set, the last retry may be performed on another
3940 server even if a cookie references a different server.
3941
3942 See also : "option redispatch"
3943
3944
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01003945rspadd <string> [{if | unless} <cond>]
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003946 Add a header at the end of the HTTP response
3947 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3948 no | yes | yes | yes
3949 Arguments :
3950 <string> is the complete line to be added. Any space or known delimiter
3951 must be escaped using a backslash ('\'). Please refer to section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003952 6 about HTTP header manipulation for more information.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003953
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01003954 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3955 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3956
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003957 A new line consisting in <string> followed by a line feed will be added after
3958 the last header of an HTTP response.
3959
3960 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
3961 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
3962 responses.
3963
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01003964 See also: "reqadd", section 6 about HTTP header manipulation, and section 7
3965 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003966
3967
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01003968rspdel <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3969rspidel <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003970 Delete all headers matching a regular expression in an HTTP response
3971 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3972 no | yes | yes | yes
3973 Arguments :
3974 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3975 response line. This is an extended regular expression, so
3976 parenthesis grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash
3977 is required. Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using
3978 a backslash ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time.
3979 The "rspdel" keyword strictly matches case while "rspidel"
3980 ignores case.
3981
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01003982 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3983 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3984
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003985 Any header line matching extended regular expression <search> in the response
3986 will be completely deleted. Most common use of this is to remove unwanted
3987 and/or sensible headers or cookies from a response before passing it to the
3988 client.
3989
3990 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
3991 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
3992 responses. Keep in mind that header names are not case-sensitive.
3993
3994 Example :
3995 # remove the Server header from responses
3996 reqidel ^Server:.*
3997
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01003998 See also: "rspadd", "rsprep", "reqdel", section 6 about HTTP header
3999 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004000
4001
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004002rspdeny <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
4003rspideny <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004004 Block an HTTP response if a line matches a regular expression
4005 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4006 no | yes | yes | yes
4007 Arguments :
4008 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
4009 response line. This is an extended regular expression, so
4010 parenthesis grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash
4011 is required. Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using
4012 a backslash ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time.
4013 The "rspdeny" keyword strictly matches case while "rspideny"
4014 ignores case.
4015
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004016 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
4017 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
4018
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004019 A response containing any line which matches extended regular expression
4020 <search> will mark the request as denied. The test applies both to the
4021 response line and to response headers. Keep in mind that header names are not
4022 case-sensitive.
4023
4024 Main use of this keyword is to prevent sensitive information leak and to
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01004025 block the response before it reaches the client. If a response is denied, it
4026 will be replaced with an HTTP 502 error so that the client never retrieves
4027 any sensitive data.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004028
4029 It is easier, faster and more powerful to use ACLs to write access policies.
4030 Rspdeny should be avoided in new designs.
4031
4032 Example :
4033 # Ensure that no content type matching ms-word will leak
4034 rspideny ^Content-type:\.*/ms-word
4035
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004036 See also: "reqdeny", "acl", "block", section 6 about HTTP header manipulation
4037 and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004038
4039
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004040rsprep <search> <string> [{if | unless} <cond>]
4041rspirep <search> <string> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004042 Replace a regular expression with a string in an HTTP response line
4043 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4044 no | yes | yes | yes
4045 Arguments :
4046 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
4047 response line. This is an extended regular expression, so
4048 parenthesis grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash
4049 is required. Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using
4050 a backslash ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time.
4051 The "rsprep" keyword strictly matches case while "rspirep"
4052 ignores case.
4053
4054 <string> is the complete line to be added. Any space or known delimiter
4055 must be escaped using a backslash ('\'). References to matched
4056 pattern groups are possible using the common \N form, with N
4057 being a single digit between 0 and 9. Please refer to section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004058 6 about HTTP header manipulation for more information.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004059
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004060 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
4061 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
4062
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004063 Any line matching extended regular expression <search> in the response (both
4064 the response line and header lines) will be completely replaced with
4065 <string>. Most common use of this is to rewrite Location headers.
4066
4067 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
4068 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
4069 responses. Note that for increased readability, it is suggested to add enough
4070 spaces between the request and the response. Keep in mind that header names
4071 are not case-sensitive.
4072
4073 Example :
4074 # replace "Location: 127.0.0.1:8080" with "Location: www.mydomain.com"
4075 rspirep ^Location:\ 127.0.0.1:8080 Location:\ www.mydomain.com
4076
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004077 See also: "rspadd", "rspdel", "reqrep", section 6 about HTTP header
4078 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004079
4080
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004081server <name> <address>[:port] [param*]
4082 Declare a server in a backend
4083 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4084 no | no | yes | yes
4085 Arguments :
4086 <name> is the internal name assigned to this server. This name will
4087 appear in logs and alerts.
4088
4089 <address> is the IPv4 address of the server. Alternatively, a resolvable
4090 hostname is supported, but this name will be resolved during
4091 start-up.
4092
4093 <ports> is an optional port specification. If set, all connections will
4094 be sent to this port. If unset, the same port the client
4095 connected to will be used. The port may also be prefixed by a "+"
4096 or a "-". In this case, the server's port will be determined by
4097 adding this value to the client's port.
4098
4099 <param*> is a list of parameters for this server. The "server" keywords
4100 accepts an important number of options and has a complete section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004101 dedicated to it. Please refer to section 5 for more details.
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004102
4103 Examples :
4104 server first 10.1.1.1:1080 cookie first check inter 1000
4105 server second 10.1.1.2:1080 cookie second check inter 1000
4106
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01004107 See also: "default-server" and section 5 about server options
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004108
4109
4110source <addr>[:<port>] [usesrc { <addr2>[:<port2>] | client | clientip } ]
Willy Tarreaud53f96b2009-02-04 18:46:54 +01004111source <addr>[:<port>] [interface <name>]
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004112 Set the source address for outgoing connections
4113 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4114 yes | no | yes | yes
4115 Arguments :
4116 <addr> is the IPv4 address HAProxy will bind to before connecting to a
4117 server. This address is also used as a source for health checks.
4118 The default value of 0.0.0.0 means that the system will select
4119 the most appropriate address to reach its destination.
4120
4121 <port> is an optional port. It is normally not needed but may be useful
4122 in some very specific contexts. The default value of zero means
Willy Tarreauc6f4ce82009-06-10 11:09:37 +02004123 the system will select a free port. Note that port ranges are not
4124 supported in the backend. If you want to force port ranges, you
4125 have to specify them on each "server" line.
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004126
4127 <addr2> is the IP address to present to the server when connections are
4128 forwarded in full transparent proxy mode. This is currently only
4129 supported on some patched Linux kernels. When this address is
4130 specified, clients connecting to the server will be presented
4131 with this address, while health checks will still use the address
4132 <addr>.
4133
4134 <port2> is the optional port to present to the server when connections
4135 are forwarded in full transparent proxy mode (see <addr2> above).
4136 The default value of zero means the system will select a free
4137 port.
4138
Willy Tarreaud53f96b2009-02-04 18:46:54 +01004139 <name> is an optional interface name to which to bind to for outgoing
4140 traffic. On systems supporting this features (currently, only
4141 Linux), this allows one to bind all traffic to the server to
4142 this interface even if it is not the one the system would select
4143 based on routing tables. This should be used with extreme care.
4144 Note that using this option requires root privileges.
4145
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004146 The "source" keyword is useful in complex environments where a specific
4147 address only is allowed to connect to the servers. It may be needed when a
4148 private address must be used through a public gateway for instance, and it is
4149 known that the system cannot determine the adequate source address by itself.
4150
4151 An extension which is available on certain patched Linux kernels may be used
4152 through the "usesrc" optional keyword. It makes it possible to connect to the
4153 servers with an IP address which does not belong to the system itself. This
4154 is called "full transparent proxy mode". For this to work, the destination
4155 servers have to route their traffic back to this address through the machine
4156 running HAProxy, and IP forwarding must generally be enabled on this machine.
4157
4158 In this "full transparent proxy" mode, it is possible to force a specific IP
4159 address to be presented to the servers. This is not much used in fact. A more
4160 common use is to tell HAProxy to present the client's IP address. For this,
4161 there are two methods :
4162
4163 - present the client's IP and port addresses. This is the most transparent
4164 mode, but it can cause problems when IP connection tracking is enabled on
4165 the machine, because a same connection may be seen twice with different
4166 states. However, this solution presents the huge advantage of not
4167 limiting the system to the 64k outgoing address+port couples, because all
4168 of the client ranges may be used.
4169
4170 - present only the client's IP address and select a spare port. This
4171 solution is still quite elegant but slightly less transparent (downstream
4172 firewalls logs will not match upstream's). It also presents the downside
4173 of limiting the number of concurrent connections to the usual 64k ports.
4174 However, since the upstream and downstream ports are different, local IP
4175 connection tracking on the machine will not be upset by the reuse of the
4176 same session.
4177
4178 Note that depending on the transparent proxy technology used, it may be
4179 required to force the source address. In fact, cttproxy version 2 requires an
4180 IP address in <addr> above, and does not support setting of "0.0.0.0" as the
4181 IP address because it creates NAT entries which much match the exact outgoing
4182 address. Tproxy version 4 and some other kernel patches which work in pure
4183 forwarding mode generally will not have this limitation.
4184
4185 This option sets the default source for all servers in the backend. It may
4186 also be specified in a "defaults" section. Finer source address specification
4187 is possible at the server level using the "source" server option. Refer to
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004188 section 5 for more information.
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004189
4190 Examples :
4191 backend private
4192 # Connect to the servers using our 192.168.1.200 source address
4193 source 192.168.1.200
4194
4195 backend transparent_ssl1
4196 # Connect to the SSL farm from the client's source address
4197 source 192.168.1.200 usesrc clientip
4198
4199 backend transparent_ssl2
4200 # Connect to the SSL farm from the client's source address and port
4201 # not recommended if IP conntrack is present on the local machine.
4202 source 192.168.1.200 usesrc client
4203
4204 backend transparent_ssl3
4205 # Connect to the SSL farm from the client's source address. It
4206 # is more conntrack-friendly.
4207 source 192.168.1.200 usesrc clientip
4208
4209 backend transparent_smtp
4210 # Connect to the SMTP farm from the client's source address/port
4211 # with Tproxy version 4.
4212 source 0.0.0.0 usesrc clientip
4213
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004214 See also : the "source" server option in section 5, the Tproxy patches for
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004215 the Linux kernel on www.balabit.com, the "bind" keyword.
4216
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01004217
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01004218srvtimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
4219 Set the maximum inactivity time on the server side.
4220 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4221 yes | no | yes | yes
4222 Arguments :
4223 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
4224 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
4225 as explained at the top of this document.
4226
4227 The inactivity timeout applies when the server is expected to acknowledge or
4228 send data. In HTTP mode, this timeout is particularly important to consider
4229 during the first phase of the server's response, when it has to send the
4230 headers, as it directly represents the server's processing time for the
4231 request. To find out what value to put there, it's often good to start with
4232 what would be considered as unacceptable response times, then check the logs
4233 to observe the response time distribution, and adjust the value accordingly.
4234
4235 The value is specified in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other
4236 unit if the number is suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this
4237 document. In TCP mode (and to a lesser extent, in HTTP mode), it is highly
4238 recommended that the client timeout remains equal to the server timeout in
4239 order to avoid complex situations to debug. Whatever the expected server
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01004240 response times, it is a good practice to cover at least one or several TCP
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01004241 packet losses by specifying timeouts that are slightly above multiples of 3
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01004242 seconds (eg: 4 or 5 seconds minimum).
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01004243
4244 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
4245 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
4246 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
4247 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
4248 during startup because it may results in accumulation of expired sessions in
4249 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
4250
4251 This parameter is provided for compatibility but is currently deprecated.
4252 Please use "timeout server" instead.
4253
4254 See also : "timeout server", "timeout client" and "clitimeout".
4255
4256
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004257stats auth <user>:<passwd>
4258 Enable statistics with authentication and grant access to an account
4259 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4260 yes | no | yes | yes
4261 Arguments :
4262 <user> is a user name to grant access to
4263
4264 <passwd> is the cleartext password associated to this user
4265
4266 This statement enables statistics with default settings, and restricts access
4267 to declared users only. It may be repeated as many times as necessary to
4268 allow as many users as desired. When a user tries to access the statistics
4269 without a valid account, a "401 Forbidden" response will be returned so that
4270 the browser asks the user to provide a valid user and password. The real
4271 which will be returned to the browser is configurable using "stats realm".
4272
4273 Since the authentication method is HTTP Basic Authentication, the passwords
4274 circulate in cleartext on the network. Thus, it was decided that the
4275 configuration file would also use cleartext passwords to remind the users
4276 that those ones should not be sensible and not shared with any other account.
4277
4278 It is also possible to reduce the scope of the proxies which appear in the
4279 report using "stats scope".
4280
4281 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4282 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4283 unobvious parameters.
4284
4285 Example :
4286 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4287 backend public_www
4288 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4289 stats enable
4290 stats hide-version
4291 stats scope .
4292 stats uri /admin?stats
4293 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4294 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4295 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4296
4297 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4298 backend private_monitoring
4299 stats enable
4300 stats uri /admin?stats
4301 stats refresh 5s
4302
4303 See also : "stats enable", "stats realm", "stats scope", "stats uri"
4304
4305
4306stats enable
4307 Enable statistics reporting with default settings
4308 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4309 yes | no | yes | yes
4310 Arguments : none
4311
4312 This statement enables statistics reporting with default settings defined
4313 at build time. Unless stated otherwise, these settings are used :
4314 - stats uri : /haproxy?stats
4315 - stats realm : "HAProxy Statistics"
4316 - stats auth : no authentication
4317 - stats scope : no restriction
4318
4319 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4320 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4321 unobvious parameters.
4322
4323 Example :
4324 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4325 backend public_www
4326 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4327 stats enable
4328 stats hide-version
4329 stats scope .
4330 stats uri /admin?stats
4331 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4332 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4333 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4334
4335 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4336 backend private_monitoring
4337 stats enable
4338 stats uri /admin?stats
4339 stats refresh 5s
4340
4341 See also : "stats auth", "stats realm", "stats uri"
4342
4343
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +02004344stats show-node [ <name> ]
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004345 Enable reporting of a host name on the statistics page.
4346 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4347 yes | no | yes | yes
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +02004348 Arguments:
4349 <name> is an optional name to be reported. If unspecified, the
4350 node name from global section is automatically used instead.
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004351
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +02004352 This statement is useful for users that offer shared services to their
4353 customers, where node or description might be different on a stats page
4354 provided for each customer.
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004355
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +02004356 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4357 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4358 unobvious parameters.
4359
4360 Example:
4361 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4362 backend private_monitoring
4363 stats enable
4364 stats show-node Europe-1
4365 stats uri /admin?stats
4366 stats refresh 5s
4367
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01004368 See also: "show-desc", "stats enable", "stats uri", and "node" in global
4369 section.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +02004370
4371
4372stats show-desc [ <description> ]
4373 Enable reporting of a description on the statistics page.
4374 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4375 yes | no | yes | yes
4376
4377 <name> is an optional description to be reported. If unspecified, the
4378 description from global section is automatically used instead.
4379
4380 This statement is useful for users that offer shared services to their
4381 customers, where node or description should be different for each customer.
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004382
4383 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4384 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4385 unobvious parameters.
4386
4387 Example :
4388 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4389 backend private_monitoring
4390 stats enable
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +02004391 stats show-desc Master node for Europe, Asia, Africa
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004392 stats uri /admin?stats
4393 stats refresh 5s
4394
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01004395 See also: "show-node", "stats enable", "stats uri" and "description" in
4396 global section.
4397
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004398
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki15514c22010-01-04 16:03:09 +01004399stats show-legends
4400 Enable reporting additional informations on the statistics page :
4401 - cap: capabilities (proxy)
4402 - mode: one of tcp, http or health (proxy)
4403 - id: SNMP ID (proxy, socket, server)
4404 - IP (socket, server)
4405 - cookie (backend, server)
4406
4407 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4408 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4409 unobvious parameters.
4410
4411 See also: "stats enable", "stats uri".
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004412
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01004413
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004414stats realm <realm>
4415 Enable statistics and set authentication realm
4416 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4417 yes | no | yes | yes
4418 Arguments :
4419 <realm> is the name of the HTTP Basic Authentication realm reported to
4420 the browser. The browser uses it to display it in the pop-up
4421 inviting the user to enter a valid username and password.
4422
4423 The realm is read as a single word, so any spaces in it should be escaped
4424 using a backslash ('\').
4425
4426 This statement is useful only in conjunction with "stats auth" since it is
4427 only related to authentication.
4428
4429 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4430 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4431 unobvious parameters.
4432
4433 Example :
4434 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4435 backend public_www
4436 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4437 stats enable
4438 stats hide-version
4439 stats scope .
4440 stats uri /admin?stats
4441 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4442 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4443 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4444
4445 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4446 backend private_monitoring
4447 stats enable
4448 stats uri /admin?stats
4449 stats refresh 5s
4450
4451 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats uri"
4452
4453
4454stats refresh <delay>
4455 Enable statistics with automatic refresh
4456 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4457 yes | no | yes | yes
4458 Arguments :
4459 <delay> is the suggested refresh delay, specified in seconds, which will
4460 be returned to the browser consulting the report page. While the
4461 browser is free to apply any delay, it will generally respect it
4462 and refresh the page this every seconds. The refresh interval may
4463 be specified in any other non-default time unit, by suffixing the
4464 unit after the value, as explained at the top of this document.
4465
4466 This statement is useful on monitoring displays with a permanent page
4467 reporting the load balancer's activity. When set, the HTML report page will
4468 include a link "refresh"/"stop refresh" so that the user can select whether
4469 he wants automatic refresh of the page or not.
4470
4471 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4472 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4473 unobvious parameters.
4474
4475 Example :
4476 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4477 backend public_www
4478 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4479 stats enable
4480 stats hide-version
4481 stats scope .
4482 stats uri /admin?stats
4483 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4484 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4485 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4486
4487 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4488 backend private_monitoring
4489 stats enable
4490 stats uri /admin?stats
4491 stats refresh 5s
4492
4493 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats realm", "stats uri"
4494
4495
4496stats scope { <name> | "." }
4497 Enable statistics and limit access scope
4498 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4499 yes | no | yes | yes
4500 Arguments :
4501 <name> is the name of a listen, frontend or backend section to be
4502 reported. The special name "." (a single dot) designates the
4503 section in which the statement appears.
4504
4505 When this statement is specified, only the sections enumerated with this
4506 statement will appear in the report. All other ones will be hidden. This
4507 statement may appear as many times as needed if multiple sections need to be
4508 reported. Please note that the name checking is performed as simple string
4509 comparisons, and that it is never checked that a give section name really
4510 exists.
4511
4512 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4513 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4514 unobvious parameters.
4515
4516 Example :
4517 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4518 backend public_www
4519 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4520 stats enable
4521 stats hide-version
4522 stats scope .
4523 stats uri /admin?stats
4524 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4525 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4526 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4527
4528 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4529 backend private_monitoring
4530 stats enable
4531 stats uri /admin?stats
4532 stats refresh 5s
4533
4534 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats realm", "stats uri"
4535
4536
4537stats uri <prefix>
4538 Enable statistics and define the URI prefix to access them
4539 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4540 yes | no | yes | yes
4541 Arguments :
4542 <prefix> is the prefix of any URI which will be redirected to stats. This
4543 prefix may contain a question mark ('?') to indicate part of a
4544 query string.
4545
4546 The statistics URI is intercepted on the relayed traffic, so it appears as a
4547 page within the normal application. It is strongly advised to ensure that the
4548 selected URI will never appear in the application, otherwise it will never be
4549 possible to reach it in the application.
4550
4551 The default URI compiled in haproxy is "/haproxy?stats", but this may be
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01004552 changed at build time, so it's better to always explicitly specify it here.
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004553 It is generally a good idea to include a question mark in the URI so that
4554 intermediate proxies refrain from caching the results. Also, since any string
4555 beginning with the prefix will be accepted as a stats request, the question
4556 mark helps ensuring that no valid URI will begin with the same words.
4557
4558 It is sometimes very convenient to use "/" as the URI prefix, and put that
4559 statement in a "listen" instance of its own. That makes it easy to dedicate
4560 an address or a port to statistics only.
4561
4562 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4563 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4564 unobvious parameters.
4565
4566 Example :
4567 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4568 backend public_www
4569 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4570 stats enable
4571 stats hide-version
4572 stats scope .
4573 stats uri /admin?stats
4574 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4575 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4576 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4577
4578 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4579 backend private_monitoring
4580 stats enable
4581 stats uri /admin?stats
4582 stats refresh 5s
4583
4584 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats realm"
4585
4586
4587stats hide-version
4588 Enable statistics and hide HAProxy version reporting
4589 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4590 yes | no | yes | yes
4591 Arguments : none
4592
4593 By default, the stats page reports some useful status information along with
4594 the statistics. Among them is HAProxy's version. However, it is generally
4595 considered dangerous to report precise version to anyone, as it can help them
4596 target known weaknesses with specific attacks. The "stats hide-version"
4597 statement removes the version from the statistics report. This is recommended
4598 for public sites or any site with a weak login/password.
4599
4600 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4601 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4602 unobvious parameters.
4603
4604 Example :
4605 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4606 backend public_www
4607 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4608 stats enable
4609 stats hide-version
4610 stats scope .
4611 stats uri /admin?stats
4612 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4613 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4614 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4615
4616 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4617 backend private_monitoring
4618 stats enable
4619 stats uri /admin?stats
4620 stats refresh 5s
4621
4622 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats realm", "stats uri"
4623
4624
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +01004625stick match <pattern> [table <table>] [{if | unless} <cond>]
4626 Define a request pattern matching condition to stick a user to a server
4627 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4628 no | no | yes | yes
4629
4630 Arguments :
4631 <pattern> is a pattern extraction rule as described in section 7.8. It
4632 describes what elements of the incoming request or connection
4633 will be analysed in the hope to find a matching entry in a
4634 stickiness table. This rule is mandatory.
4635
4636 <table> is an optional stickiness table name. If unspecified, the same
4637 backend's table is used. A stickiness table is declared using
4638 the "stick-table" statement.
4639
4640 <cond> is an optional matching condition. It makes it possible to match
4641 on a certain criterion only when other conditions are met (or
4642 not met). For instance, it could be used to match on a source IP
4643 address except when a request passes through a known proxy, in
4644 which case we'd match on a header containing that IP address.
4645
4646 Some protocols or applications require complex stickiness rules and cannot
4647 always simply rely on cookies nor hashing. The "stick match" statement
4648 describes a rule to extract the stickiness criterion from an incoming request
4649 or connection. See section 7 for a complete list of possible patterns and
4650 transformation rules.
4651
4652 The table has to be declared using the "stick-table" statement. It must be of
4653 a type compatible with the pattern. By default it is the one which is present
4654 in the same backend. It is possible to share a table with other backends by
4655 referencing it using the "table" keyword. If another table is referenced,
4656 the server's ID inside the backends are used. By default, all server IDs
4657 start at 1 in each backend, so the server ordering is enough. But in case of
4658 doubt, it is highly recommended to force server IDs using their "id" setting.
4659
4660 It is possible to restrict the conditions where a "stick match" statement
4661 will apply, using "if" or "unless" followed by a condition. See section 7 for
4662 ACL based conditions.
4663
4664 There is no limit on the number of "stick match" statements. The first that
4665 applies and matches will cause the request to be directed to the same server
4666 as was used for the request which created the entry. That way, multiple
4667 matches can be used as fallbacks.
4668
4669 The stick rules are checked after the persistence cookies, so they will not
4670 affect stickiness if a cookie has already been used to select a server. That
4671 way, it becomes very easy to insert cookies and match on IP addresses in
4672 order to maintain stickiness between HTTP and HTTPS.
4673
4674 Example :
4675 # forward SMTP users to the same server they just used for POP in the
4676 # last 30 minutes
4677 backend pop
4678 mode tcp
4679 balance roundrobin
4680 stick store-request src
4681 stick-table type ip size 200k expire 30m
4682 server s1 192.168.1.1:110
4683 server s2 192.168.1.1:110
4684
4685 backend smtp
4686 mode tcp
4687 balance roundrobin
4688 stick match src table pop
4689 server s1 192.168.1.1:25
4690 server s2 192.168.1.1:25
4691
4692 See also : "stick-table", "stick on", and section 7 about ACLs and pattern
4693 extraction.
4694
4695
4696stick on <pattern> [table <table>] [{if | unless} <condition>]
4697 Define a request pattern to associate a user to a server
4698 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4699 no | no | yes | yes
4700
4701 Note : This form is exactly equivalent to "stick match" followed by
4702 "stick store-request", all with the same arguments. Please refer
4703 to both keywords for details. It is only provided as a convenience
4704 for writing more maintainable configurations.
4705
4706 Examples :
4707 # The following form ...
4708 stick or src table pop if !localhost
4709
4710 # ...is strictly equivalent to this one :
4711 stick match src table pop if !localhost
4712 stick store-request src table pop if !localhost
4713
4714
4715 # Use cookie persistence for HTTP, and stick on source address for HTTPS as
4716 # well as HTTP without cookie. Share the same table between both accesses.
4717 backend http
4718 mode http
4719 balance roundrobin
4720 stick on src table https
4721 cookie SRV insert indirect nocache
4722 server s1 192.168.1.1:80 cookie s1
4723 server s2 192.168.1.1:80 cookie s2
4724
4725 backend https
4726 mode tcp
4727 balance roundrobin
4728 stick-table type ip size 200k expire 30m
4729 stick on src
4730 server s1 192.168.1.1:443
4731 server s2 192.168.1.1:443
4732
4733 See also : "stick match" and "stick store-request"
4734
4735
4736stick store-request <pattern> [table <table>] [{if | unless} <condition>]
4737 Define a request pattern used to create an entry in a stickiness table
4738 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4739 no | no | yes | yes
4740
4741 Arguments :
4742 <pattern> is a pattern extraction rule as described in section 7.8. It
4743 describes what elements of the incoming request or connection
4744 will be analysed, extracted and stored in the table once a
4745 server is selected.
4746
4747 <table> is an optional stickiness table name. If unspecified, the same
4748 backend's table is used. A stickiness table is declared using
4749 the "stick-table" statement.
4750
4751 <cond> is an optional storage condition. It makes it possible to store
4752 certain criteria only when some conditions are met (or not met).
4753 For instance, it could be used to store the source IP address
4754 except when the request passes through a known proxy, in which
4755 case we'd store a converted form of a header containing that IP
4756 address.
4757
4758 Some protocols or applications require complex stickiness rules and cannot
4759 always simply rely on cookies nor hashing. The "stick store-request" statement
4760 describes a rule to decide what to extract from the request and when to do
4761 it, in order to store it into a stickiness table for further requests to
4762 match it using the "stick match" statement. Obviously the extracted part must
4763 make sense and have a chance to be matched in a further request. Storing a
4764 client's IP address for instance often makes sense. Storing an ID found in a
4765 URL parameter also makes sense. Storing a source port will almost never make
4766 any sense because it will be randomly matched. See section 7 for a complete
4767 list of possible patterns and transformation rules.
4768
4769 The table has to be declared using the "stick-table" statement. It must be of
4770 a type compatible with the pattern. By default it is the one which is present
4771 in the same backend. It is possible to share a table with other backends by
4772 referencing it using the "table" keyword. If another table is referenced,
4773 the server's ID inside the backends are used. By default, all server IDs
4774 start at 1 in each backend, so the server ordering is enough. But in case of
4775 doubt, it is highly recommended to force server IDs using their "id" setting.
4776
4777 It is possible to restrict the conditions where a "stick store-request"
4778 statement will apply, using "if" or "unless" followed by a condition. This
4779 condition will be evaluated while parsing the request, so any criteria can be
4780 used. See section 7 for ACL based conditions.
4781
4782 There is no limit on the number of "stick store-request" statements, but
4783 there is a limit of 8 simultaneous stores per request or response. This
4784 makes it possible to store up to 8 criteria, all extracted from either the
4785 request or the response, regardless of the number of rules. Only the 8 first
4786 ones which match will be kept. Using this, it is possible to feed multiple
4787 tables at once in the hope to increase the chance to recognize a user on
4788 another protocol or access method.
4789
4790 The "store-request" rules are evaluated once the server connection has been
4791 established, so that the table will contain the real server that processed
4792 the request.
4793
4794 Example :
4795 # forward SMTP users to the same server they just used for POP in the
4796 # last 30 minutes
4797 backend pop
4798 mode tcp
4799 balance roundrobin
4800 stick store-request src
4801 stick-table type ip size 200k expire 30m
4802 server s1 192.168.1.1:110
4803 server s2 192.168.1.1:110
4804
4805 backend smtp
4806 mode tcp
4807 balance roundrobin
4808 stick match src table pop
4809 server s1 192.168.1.1:25
4810 server s2 192.168.1.1:25
4811
4812 See also : "stick-table", "stick on", and section 7 about ACLs and pattern
4813 extraction.
4814
4815
4816stick-table type {ip | integer | string [len <length>] } size <size>
4817 [expire <expire>] [nopurge]
4818 Configure the stickiness table for the current backend
4819 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4820 no | no | yes | yes
4821
4822 Arguments :
4823 ip a table declared with "type ip" will only store IPv4 addresses.
4824 This form is very compact (about 50 bytes per entry) and allows
4825 very fast entry lookup and stores with almost no overhead. This
4826 is mainly used to store client source IP addresses.
4827
4828 integer a table declared with "type integer" will store 32bit integers
4829 which can represent a client identifier found in a request for
4830 instance.
4831
4832 string a table declared with "type string" will store substrings of up
4833 to <len> characters. If the string provided by the pattern
4834 extractor is larger than <len>, it will be truncated before
4835 being stored. During matching, at most <len> characters will be
4836 compared between the string in the table and the extracted
4837 pattern. When not specified, the string is automatically limited
4838 to 31 characters.
4839
4840 <length> is the maximum number of characters that will be stored in a
4841 "string" type table. See type "string" above. Be careful when
4842 changing this parameter as memory usage will proportionally
4843 increase.
4844
4845 <size> is the maximum number of entries that can fit in the table. This
4846 value directly impats memory usage. Count approximately 50 bytes
4847 per entry, plus the size of a string if any. The size supports
4848 suffixes "k", "m", "g" for 2^10, 2^20 and 2^30 factors.
4849
4850 [nopurge] indicates that we refuse to purge older entries when the table
4851 is full. When not specified and the table is full when haproxy
4852 wants to store an entry in it, it will flush a few of the oldest
4853 entries in order to release some space for the new ones. This is
4854 most often the desired behaviour. In some specific cases, it
4855 be desirable to refuse new entries instead of purging the older
4856 ones. That may be the case when the amount of data to store is
4857 far above the hardware limits and we prefer not to offer access
4858 to new clients than to reject the ones already connected. When
4859 using this parameter, be sure to properly set the "expire"
4860 parameter (see below).
4861
4862 <expire> defines the maximum duration of an entry in the table since it
4863 was last created, refreshed or matched. The expiration delay is
4864 defined using the standard time format, similarly as the various
4865 timeouts. The maximum duration is slightly above 24 days. See
4866 section 2.2 for more information. If this delay is not specified,
4867 the session won't automatically expire, but older entries will
4868 be removed once full. Be sure not to use the "nopurge" parameter
4869 if not expiration delay is specified.
4870
4871 The is only one stick-table per backend. At the moment of writing this doc,
4872 it does not seem useful to have multiple tables per backend. If this happens
4873 to be required, simply create a dummy backend with a stick-table in it and
4874 reference it.
4875
4876 It is important to understand that stickiness based on learning information
4877 has some limitations, including the fact that all learned associations are
4878 lost upon restart. In general it can be good as a complement but not always
4879 as an exclusive stickiness.
4880
4881 See also : "stick match", "stick on", "stick store-request", and section 2.2
4882 about time format.
4883
4884
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004885tcp-request content accept [{if | unless} <condition>]
4886 Accept a connection if/unless a content inspection condition is matched
4887 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4888 no | yes | yes | no
4889
4890 During TCP content inspection, the connection is immediately validated if the
4891 condition is true (when used with "if") or false (when used with "unless").
4892 Most of the time during content inspection, a condition will be in an
4893 uncertain state which is neither true nor false. The evaluation immediately
4894 stops when such a condition is encountered. It is important to understand
4895 that "accept" and "reject" rules are evaluated in their exact declaration
4896 order, so that it is possible to build complex rules from them. There is no
4897 specific limit to the number of rules which may be inserted.
4898
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01004899 Note that the "if/unless" condition is optional. If no condition is set on
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004900 the action, it is simply performed unconditionally.
4901
4902 If no "tcp-request content" rules are matched, the default action already is
4903 "accept". Thus, this statement alone does not bring anything without another
4904 "reject" statement.
4905
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004906 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004907
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02004908 See also : "tcp-request content reject", "tcp-request inspect-delay"
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004909
4910
4911tcp-request content reject [{if | unless} <condition>]
4912 Reject a connection if/unless a content inspection condition is matched
4913 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4914 no | yes | yes | no
4915
4916 During TCP content inspection, the connection is immediately rejected if the
4917 condition is true (when used with "if") or false (when used with "unless").
4918 Most of the time during content inspection, a condition will be in an
4919 uncertain state which is neither true nor false. The evaluation immediately
4920 stops when such a condition is encountered. It is important to understand
4921 that "accept" and "reject" rules are evaluated in their exact declaration
4922 order, so that it is possible to build complex rules from them. There is no
4923 specific limit to the number of rules which may be inserted.
4924
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01004925 Note that the "if/unless" condition is optional. If no condition is set on
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004926 the action, it is simply performed unconditionally.
4927
4928 If no "tcp-request content" rules are matched, the default action is set to
4929 "accept".
4930
4931 Example:
4932 # reject SMTP connection if client speaks first
4933 tcp-request inspect-delay 30s
4934 acl content_present req_len gt 0
4935 tcp-request reject if content_present
4936
4937 # Forward HTTPS connection only if client speaks
4938 tcp-request inspect-delay 30s
4939 acl content_present req_len gt 0
4940 tcp-request accept if content_present
4941 tcp-request reject
4942
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004943 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004944
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02004945 See also : "tcp-request content accept", "tcp-request inspect-delay"
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004946
4947
4948tcp-request inspect-delay <timeout>
4949 Set the maximum allowed time to wait for data during content inspection
4950 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4951 no | yes | yes | no
4952 Arguments :
4953 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
4954 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
4955 as explained at the top of this document.
4956
4957 People using haproxy primarily as a TCP relay are often worried about the
4958 risk of passing any type of protocol to a server without any analysis. In
4959 order to be able to analyze the request contents, we must first withhold
4960 the data then analyze them. This statement simply enables withholding of
4961 data for at most the specified amount of time.
4962
4963 Note that when performing content inspection, haproxy will evaluate the whole
4964 rules for every new chunk which gets in, taking into account the fact that
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01004965 those data are partial. If no rule matches before the aforementioned delay,
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004966 a last check is performed upon expiration, this time considering that the
Willy Tarreaud869b242009-03-15 14:43:58 +01004967 contents are definitive. If no delay is set, haproxy will not wait at all
4968 and will immediately apply a verdict based on the available information.
4969 Obviously this is unlikely to be very useful and might even be racy, so such
4970 setups are not recommended.
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004971
4972 As soon as a rule matches, the request is released and continues as usual. If
4973 the timeout is reached and no rule matches, the default policy will be to let
4974 it pass through unaffected.
4975
4976 For most protocols, it is enough to set it to a few seconds, as most clients
4977 send the full request immediately upon connection. Add 3 or more seconds to
4978 cover TCP retransmits but that's all. For some protocols, it may make sense
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01004979 to use large values, for instance to ensure that the client never talks
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004980 before the server (eg: SMTP), or to wait for a client to talk before passing
4981 data to the server (eg: SSL). Note that the client timeout must cover at
4982 least the inspection delay, otherwise it will expire first.
4983
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02004984 See also : "tcp-request content accept", "tcp-request content reject",
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004985 "timeout client".
4986
4987
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +01004988timeout check <timeout>
4989 Set additional check timeout, but only after a connection has been already
4990 established.
4991
4992 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4993 yes | no | yes | yes
4994 Arguments:
4995 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
4996 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
4997 as explained at the top of this document.
4998
4999 If set, haproxy uses min("timeout connect", "inter") as a connect timeout
5000 for check and "timeout check" as an additional read timeout. The "min" is
5001 used so that people running with *very* long "timeout connect" (eg. those
5002 who needed this due to the queue or tarpit) do not slow down their checks.
5003 Of course it is better to use "check queue" and "check tarpit" instead of
5004 long "timeout connect".
5005
5006 If "timeout check" is not set haproxy uses "inter" for complete check
5007 timeout (connect + read) exactly like all <1.3.15 version.
5008
5009 In most cases check request is much simpler and faster to handle than normal
5010 requests and people may want to kick out laggy servers so this timeout should
Willy Tarreau41a340d2008-01-22 12:25:31 +01005011 be smaller than "timeout server".
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +01005012
5013 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
5014 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
5015 forget about it.
5016
Willy Tarreau41a340d2008-01-22 12:25:31 +01005017 See also: "timeout connect", "timeout queue", "timeout server",
5018 "timeout tarpit".
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +01005019
5020
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005021timeout client <timeout>
5022timeout clitimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
5023 Set the maximum inactivity time on the client side.
5024 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5025 yes | yes | yes | no
5026 Arguments :
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005027 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005028 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5029 as explained at the top of this document.
5030
5031 The inactivity timeout applies when the client is expected to acknowledge or
5032 send data. In HTTP mode, this timeout is particularly important to consider
5033 during the first phase, when the client sends the request, and during the
5034 response while it is reading data sent by the server. The value is specified
5035 in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other unit if the number is
5036 suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this document. In TCP mode
5037 (and to a lesser extent, in HTTP mode), it is highly recommended that the
5038 client timeout remains equal to the server timeout in order to avoid complex
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01005039 situations to debug. It is a good practice to cover one or several TCP packet
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005040 losses by specifying timeouts that are slightly above multiples of 3 seconds
5041 (eg: 4 or 5 seconds).
5042
5043 This parameter is specific to frontends, but can be specified once for all in
5044 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
5045 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
5046 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
5047 during startup because it may results in accumulation of expired sessions in
5048 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
5049
5050 This parameter replaces the old, deprecated "clitimeout". It is recommended
5051 to use it to write new configurations. The form "timeout clitimeout" is
5052 provided only by backwards compatibility but its use is strongly discouraged.
5053
5054 See also : "clitimeout", "timeout server".
5055
5056
5057timeout connect <timeout>
5058timeout contimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
5059 Set the maximum time to wait for a connection attempt to a server to succeed.
5060 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5061 yes | no | yes | yes
5062 Arguments :
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005063 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005064 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5065 as explained at the top of this document.
5066
5067 If the server is located on the same LAN as haproxy, the connection should be
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01005068 immediate (less than a few milliseconds). Anyway, it is a good practice to
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005069 cover one or several TCP packet losses by specifying timeouts that are
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005070 slightly above multiples of 3 seconds (eg: 4 or 5 seconds). By default, the
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +01005071 connect timeout also presets both queue and tarpit timeouts to the same value
5072 if these have not been specified.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005073
5074 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
5075 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
5076 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
5077 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
5078 during startup because it may results in accumulation of failed sessions in
5079 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
5080
5081 This parameter replaces the old, deprecated "contimeout". It is recommended
5082 to use it to write new configurations. The form "timeout contimeout" is
5083 provided only by backwards compatibility but its use is strongly discouraged.
5084
Willy Tarreau41a340d2008-01-22 12:25:31 +01005085 See also: "timeout check", "timeout queue", "timeout server", "contimeout",
5086 "timeout tarpit".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005087
5088
Willy Tarreaub16a5742010-01-10 14:46:16 +01005089timeout http-keep-alive <timeout>
5090 Set the maximum allowed time to wait for a new HTTP request to appear
5091 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5092 yes | yes | yes | yes
5093 Arguments :
5094 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
5095 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5096 as explained at the top of this document.
5097
5098 By default, the time to wait for a new request in case of keep-alive is set
5099 by "timeout http-request". However this is not always convenient because some
5100 people want very short keep-alive timeouts in order to release connections
5101 faster, and others prefer to have larger ones but still have short timeouts
5102 once the request has started to present itself.
5103
5104 The "http-keep-alive" timeout covers these needs. It will define how long to
5105 wait for a new HTTP request to start coming after a response was sent. Once
5106 the first byte of request has been seen, the "http-request" timeout is used
5107 to wait for the complete request to come. Note that empty lines prior to a
5108 new request do not refresh the timeout and are not counted as a new request.
5109
5110 There is also another difference between the two timeouts : when a connection
5111 expires during timeout http-keep-alive, no error is returned, the connection
5112 just closes. If the connection expires in "http-request" while waiting for a
5113 connection to complete, a HTTP 408 error is returned.
5114
5115 In general it is optimal to set this value to a few tens to hundreds of
5116 milliseconds, to allow users to fetch all objects of a page at once but
5117 without waiting for further clicks. Also, if set to a very small value (eg:
5118 1 millisecond) it will probably only accept pipelined requests but not the
5119 non-pipelined ones. It may be a nice trade-off for very large sites running
5120 with tends to hundreds of thousands of clients.
5121
5122 If this parameter is not set, the "http-request" timeout applies, and if both
5123 are not set, "timeout client" still applies at the lower level. It should be
5124 set in the frontend to take effect, unless the frontend is in TCP mode, in
5125 which case the HTTP backend's timeout will be used.
5126
5127 See also : "timeout http-request", "timeout client".
5128
5129
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005130timeout http-request <timeout>
5131 Set the maximum allowed time to wait for a complete HTTP request
5132 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreaucd7afc02009-07-12 10:03:17 +02005133 yes | yes | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005134 Arguments :
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005135 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005136 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5137 as explained at the top of this document.
5138
5139 In order to offer DoS protection, it may be required to lower the maximum
5140 accepted time to receive a complete HTTP request without affecting the client
5141 timeout. This helps protecting against established connections on which
5142 nothing is sent. The client timeout cannot offer a good protection against
5143 this abuse because it is an inactivity timeout, which means that if the
5144 attacker sends one character every now and then, the timeout will not
5145 trigger. With the HTTP request timeout, no matter what speed the client
5146 types, the request will be aborted if it does not complete in time.
5147
5148 Note that this timeout only applies to the header part of the request, and
5149 not to any data. As soon as the empty line is received, this timeout is not
Willy Tarreaub16a5742010-01-10 14:46:16 +01005150 used anymore. It is used again on keep-alive connections to wait for a second
5151 request if "timeout http-keep-alive" is not set.
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005152
5153 Generally it is enough to set it to a few seconds, as most clients send the
5154 full request immediately upon connection. Add 3 or more seconds to cover TCP
5155 retransmits but that's all. Setting it to very low values (eg: 50 ms) will
5156 generally work on local networks as long as there are no packet losses. This
5157 will prevent people from sending bare HTTP requests using telnet.
5158
5159 If this parameter is not set, the client timeout still applies between each
Willy Tarreaucd7afc02009-07-12 10:03:17 +02005160 chunk of the incoming request. It should be set in the frontend to take
5161 effect, unless the frontend is in TCP mode, in which case the HTTP backend's
5162 timeout will be used.
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005163
Willy Tarreaub16a5742010-01-10 14:46:16 +01005164 See also : "timeout http-keep-alive", "timeout client".
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005165
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005166
5167timeout queue <timeout>
5168 Set the maximum time to wait in the queue for a connection slot to be free
5169 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5170 yes | no | yes | yes
5171 Arguments :
5172 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
5173 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5174 as explained at the top of this document.
5175
5176 When a server's maxconn is reached, connections are left pending in a queue
5177 which may be server-specific or global to the backend. In order not to wait
5178 indefinitely, a timeout is applied to requests pending in the queue. If the
5179 timeout is reached, it is considered that the request will almost never be
5180 served, so it is dropped and a 503 error is returned to the client.
5181
5182 The "timeout queue" statement allows to fix the maximum time for a request to
5183 be left pending in a queue. If unspecified, the same value as the backend's
5184 connection timeout ("timeout connect") is used, for backwards compatibility
5185 with older versions with no "timeout queue" parameter.
5186
5187 See also : "timeout connect", "contimeout".
5188
5189
5190timeout server <timeout>
5191timeout srvtimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
5192 Set the maximum inactivity time on the server side.
5193 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5194 yes | no | yes | yes
5195 Arguments :
5196 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
5197 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5198 as explained at the top of this document.
5199
5200 The inactivity timeout applies when the server is expected to acknowledge or
5201 send data. In HTTP mode, this timeout is particularly important to consider
5202 during the first phase of the server's response, when it has to send the
5203 headers, as it directly represents the server's processing time for the
5204 request. To find out what value to put there, it's often good to start with
5205 what would be considered as unacceptable response times, then check the logs
5206 to observe the response time distribution, and adjust the value accordingly.
5207
5208 The value is specified in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other
5209 unit if the number is suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this
5210 document. In TCP mode (and to a lesser extent, in HTTP mode), it is highly
5211 recommended that the client timeout remains equal to the server timeout in
5212 order to avoid complex situations to debug. Whatever the expected server
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01005213 response times, it is a good practice to cover at least one or several TCP
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005214 packet losses by specifying timeouts that are slightly above multiples of 3
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005215 seconds (eg: 4 or 5 seconds minimum).
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005216
5217 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
5218 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
5219 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
5220 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
5221 during startup because it may results in accumulation of expired sessions in
5222 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
5223
5224 This parameter replaces the old, deprecated "srvtimeout". It is recommended
5225 to use it to write new configurations. The form "timeout srvtimeout" is
5226 provided only by backwards compatibility but its use is strongly discouraged.
5227
5228 See also : "srvtimeout", "timeout client".
5229
5230
5231timeout tarpit <timeout>
5232 Set the duration for which tapitted connections will be maintained
5233 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5234 yes | yes | yes | yes
5235 Arguments :
5236 <timeout> is the tarpit duration specified in milliseconds by default, but
5237 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5238 as explained at the top of this document.
5239
5240 When a connection is tarpitted using "reqtarpit", it is maintained open with
5241 no activity for a certain amount of time, then closed. "timeout tarpit"
5242 defines how long it will be maintained open.
5243
5244 The value is specified in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other
5245 unit if the number is suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this
5246 document. If unspecified, the same value as the backend's connection timeout
5247 ("timeout connect") is used, for backwards compatibility with older versions
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005248 with no "timeout tapit" parameter.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005249
5250 See also : "timeout connect", "contimeout".
5251
5252
5253transparent (deprecated)
5254 Enable client-side transparent proxying
5255 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreau4b1f8592008-12-23 23:13:55 +01005256 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005257 Arguments : none
5258
5259 This keyword was introduced in order to provide layer 7 persistence to layer
5260 3 load balancers. The idea is to use the OS's ability to redirect an incoming
5261 connection for a remote address to a local process (here HAProxy), and let
5262 this process know what address was initially requested. When this option is
5263 used, sessions without cookies will be forwarded to the original destination
5264 IP address of the incoming request (which should match that of another
5265 equipment), while requests with cookies will still be forwarded to the
5266 appropriate server.
5267
5268 The "transparent" keyword is deprecated, use "option transparent" instead.
5269
5270 Note that contrary to a common belief, this option does NOT make HAProxy
5271 present the client's IP to the server when establishing the connection.
5272
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005273 See also: "option transparent"
5274
5275
5276use_backend <backend> if <condition>
5277use_backend <backend> unless <condition>
Willy Tarreau1d0dfb12009-07-07 15:10:31 +02005278 Switch to a specific backend if/unless an ACL-based condition is matched.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005279 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5280 no | yes | yes | no
5281 Arguments :
5282 <backend> is the name of a valid backend or "listen" section.
5283
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005284 <condition> is a condition composed of ACLs, as described in section 7.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005285
5286 When doing content-switching, connections arrive on a frontend and are then
5287 dispatched to various backends depending on a number of conditions. The
5288 relation between the conditions and the backends is described with the
Willy Tarreau1d0dfb12009-07-07 15:10:31 +02005289 "use_backend" keyword. While it is normally used with HTTP processing, it can
5290 also be used in pure TCP, either without content using stateless ACLs (eg:
5291 source address validation) or combined with a "tcp-request" rule to wait for
5292 some payload.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005293
5294 There may be as many "use_backend" rules as desired. All of these rules are
5295 evaluated in their declaration order, and the first one which matches will
5296 assign the backend.
5297
5298 In the first form, the backend will be used if the condition is met. In the
5299 second form, the backend will be used if the condition is not met. If no
5300 condition is valid, the backend defined with "default_backend" will be used.
5301 If no default backend is defined, either the servers in the same section are
5302 used (in case of a "listen" section) or, in case of a frontend, no server is
5303 used and a 503 service unavailable response is returned.
5304
Willy Tarreau51aecc72009-07-12 09:47:04 +02005305 Note that it is possible to switch from a TCP frontend to an HTTP backend. In
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005306 this case, either the frontend has already checked that the protocol is HTTP,
Willy Tarreau51aecc72009-07-12 09:47:04 +02005307 and backend processing will immediately follow, or the backend will wait for
5308 a complete HTTP request to get in. This feature is useful when a frontend
5309 must decode several protocols on a unique port, one of them being HTTP.
5310
Willy Tarreau1d0dfb12009-07-07 15:10:31 +02005311 See also: "default_backend", "tcp-request", and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005312
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005313
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +010053145. Server and default-server options
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005315-----------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005316
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01005317The "server" and "default-server" keywords support a certain number of settings
5318which are all passed as arguments on the server line. The order in which those
5319arguments appear does not count, and they are all optional. Some of those
5320settings are single words (booleans) while others expect one or several values
5321after them. In this case, the values must immediately follow the setting name.
5322Except default-server, all those settings must be specified after the server's
5323address if they are used:
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005324
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005325 server <name> <address>[:port] [settings ...]
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01005326 default-server [settings ...]
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005327
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005328The currently supported settings are the following ones.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005329
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005330addr <ipv4>
5331 Using the "addr" parameter, it becomes possible to use a different IP address
5332 to send health-checks. On some servers, it may be desirable to dedicate an IP
5333 address to specific component able to perform complex tests which are more
5334 suitable to health-checks than the application. This parameter is ignored if
5335 the "check" parameter is not set. See also the "port" parameter.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005336
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005337 Supported in default-server: No
5338
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005339backup
5340 When "backup" is present on a server line, the server is only used in load
5341 balancing when all other non-backup servers are unavailable. Requests coming
5342 with a persistence cookie referencing the server will always be served
5343 though. By default, only the first operational backup server is used, unless
5344 the "allbackups" option is set in the backend. See also the "allbackups"
5345 option.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005346
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005347 Supported in default-server: No
5348
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005349check
5350 This option enables health checks on the server. By default, a server is
5351 always considered available. If "check" is set, the server will receive
5352 periodic health checks to ensure that it is really able to serve requests.
5353 The default address and port to send the tests to are those of the server,
5354 and the default source is the same as the one defined in the backend. It is
5355 possible to change the address using the "addr" parameter, the port using the
5356 "port" parameter, the source address using the "source" address, and the
5357 interval and timers using the "inter", "rise" and "fall" parameters. The
5358 request method is define in the backend using the "httpchk", "smtpchk",
Hervé COMMOWICK698ae002010-01-12 09:25:13 +01005359 "mysql-check" and "ssl-hello-chk" options. Please refer to those options and
5360 parameters for more information.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005361
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005362 Supported in default-server: No
5363
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005364cookie <value>
5365 The "cookie" parameter sets the cookie value assigned to the server to
5366 <value>. This value will be checked in incoming requests, and the first
5367 operational server possessing the same value will be selected. In return, in
5368 cookie insertion or rewrite modes, this value will be assigned to the cookie
5369 sent to the client. There is nothing wrong in having several servers sharing
5370 the same cookie value, and it is in fact somewhat common between normal and
5371 backup servers. See also the "cookie" keyword in backend section.
5372
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005373 Supported in default-server: No
5374
5375error-limit <count>
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01005376 If health observing is enabled, the "error-limit" parameter specifies the
5377 number of consecutive errors that triggers event selected by the "on-error"
5378 option. By default it is set to 10 consecutive errors.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005379
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005380 Supported in default-server: Yes
5381
5382 See also the "check", "error-limit" and "on-error".
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005383
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005384fall <count>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005385 The "fall" parameter states that a server will be considered as dead after
5386 <count> consecutive unsuccessful health checks. This value defaults to 3 if
5387 unspecified. See also the "check", "inter" and "rise" parameters.
5388
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005389 Supported in default-server: Yes
5390
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005391id <value>
Willy Tarreau53fb4ae2009-10-04 23:04:08 +02005392 Set a persistent ID for the server. This ID must be positive and unique for
5393 the proxy. An unused ID will automatically be assigned if unset. The first
5394 assigned value will be 1. This ID is currently only returned in statistics.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005395
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005396 Supported in default-server: No
5397
5398inter <delay>
5399fastinter <delay>
5400downinter <delay>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005401 The "inter" parameter sets the interval between two consecutive health checks
5402 to <delay> milliseconds. If left unspecified, the delay defaults to 2000 ms.
5403 It is also possible to use "fastinter" and "downinter" to optimize delays
5404 between checks depending on the server state :
5405
5406 Server state | Interval used
5407 ---------------------------------+-----------------------------------------
5408 UP 100% (non-transitional) | "inter"
5409 ---------------------------------+-----------------------------------------
5410 Transitionally UP (going down), |
5411 Transitionally DOWN (going up), | "fastinter" if set, "inter" otherwise.
5412 or yet unchecked. |
5413 ---------------------------------+-----------------------------------------
5414 DOWN 100% (non-transitional) | "downinter" if set, "inter" otherwise.
5415 ---------------------------------+-----------------------------------------
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005416
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005417 Just as with every other time-based parameter, they can be entered in any
5418 other explicit unit among { us, ms, s, m, h, d }. The "inter" parameter also
5419 serves as a timeout for health checks sent to servers if "timeout check" is
5420 not set. In order to reduce "resonance" effects when multiple servers are
5421 hosted on the same hardware, the health-checks of all servers are started
5422 with a small time offset between them. It is also possible to add some random
5423 noise in the health checks interval using the global "spread-checks"
5424 keyword. This makes sense for instance when a lot of backends use the same
5425 servers.
5426
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005427 Supported in default-server: Yes
5428
5429maxconn <maxconn>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005430 The "maxconn" parameter specifies the maximal number of concurrent
5431 connections that will be sent to this server. If the number of incoming
5432 concurrent requests goes higher than this value, they will be queued, waiting
5433 for a connection to be released. This parameter is very important as it can
5434 save fragile servers from going down under extreme loads. If a "minconn"
5435 parameter is specified, the limit becomes dynamic. The default value is "0"
5436 which means unlimited. See also the "minconn" and "maxqueue" parameters, and
5437 the backend's "fullconn" keyword.
5438
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005439 Supported in default-server: Yes
5440
5441maxqueue <maxqueue>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005442 The "maxqueue" parameter specifies the maximal number of connections which
5443 will wait in the queue for this server. If this limit is reached, next
5444 requests will be redispatched to other servers instead of indefinitely
5445 waiting to be served. This will break persistence but may allow people to
5446 quickly re-log in when the server they try to connect to is dying. The
5447 default value is "0" which means the queue is unlimited. See also the
5448 "maxconn" and "minconn" parameters.
5449
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005450 Supported in default-server: Yes
5451
5452minconn <minconn>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005453 When the "minconn" parameter is set, the maxconn limit becomes a dynamic
5454 limit following the backend's load. The server will always accept at least
5455 <minconn> connections, never more than <maxconn>, and the limit will be on
5456 the ramp between both values when the backend has less than <fullconn>
5457 concurrent connections. This makes it possible to limit the load on the
5458 server during normal loads, but push it further for important loads without
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005459 overloading the server during exceptional loads. See also the "maxconn"
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005460 and "maxqueue" parameters, as well as the "fullconn" backend keyword.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005461
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005462 Supported in default-server: Yes
5463
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005464observe <mode>
5465 This option enables health adjusting based on observing communication with
5466 the server. By default this functionality is disabled and enabling it also
5467 requires to enable health checks. There are two supported modes: "layer4" and
5468 "layer7". In layer4 mode, only successful/unsuccessful tcp connections are
5469 significant. In layer7, which is only allowed for http proxies, responses
5470 received from server are verified, like valid/wrong http code, unparsable
5471 headers, a timeout, etc.
5472
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005473 Supported in default-server: No
5474
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005475 See also the "check", "on-error" and "error-limit".
5476
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005477on-error <mode>
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005478 Select what should happen when enough consecutive errors are detected.
5479 Currently, four modes are available:
5480 - fastinter: force fastinter
5481 - fail-check: simulate a failed check, also forces fastinter (default)
5482 - sudden-death: simulate a pre-fatal failed health check, one more failed
5483 check will mark a server down, forces fastinter
5484 - mark-down: mark the server immediately down and force fastinter
5485
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005486 Supported in default-server: Yes
5487
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005488 See also the "check", "observe" and "error-limit".
5489
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005490port <port>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005491 Using the "port" parameter, it becomes possible to use a different port to
5492 send health-checks. On some servers, it may be desirable to dedicate a port
5493 to a specific component able to perform complex tests which are more suitable
5494 to health-checks than the application. It is common to run a simple script in
5495 inetd for instance. This parameter is ignored if the "check" parameter is not
5496 set. See also the "addr" parameter.
5497
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005498 Supported in default-server: Yes
5499
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005500redir <prefix>
5501 The "redir" parameter enables the redirection mode for all GET and HEAD
5502 requests addressing this server. This means that instead of having HAProxy
5503 forward the request to the server, it will send an "HTTP 302" response with
5504 the "Location" header composed of this prefix immediately followed by the
5505 requested URI beginning at the leading '/' of the path component. That means
5506 that no trailing slash should be used after <prefix>. All invalid requests
5507 will be rejected, and all non-GET or HEAD requests will be normally served by
5508 the server. Note that since the response is completely forged, no header
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005509 mangling nor cookie insertion is possible in the response. However, cookies in
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005510 requests are still analysed, making this solution completely usable to direct
5511 users to a remote location in case of local disaster. Main use consists in
5512 increasing bandwidth for static servers by having the clients directly
5513 connect to them. Note: never use a relative location here, it would cause a
5514 loop between the client and HAProxy!
5515
5516 Example : server srv1 192.168.1.1:80 redir http://image1.mydomain.com check
5517
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005518 Supported in default-server: No
5519
5520rise <count>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005521 The "rise" parameter states that a server will be considered as operational
5522 after <count> consecutive successful health checks. This value defaults to 2
5523 if unspecified. See also the "check", "inter" and "fall" parameters.
5524
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005525 Supported in default-server: Yes
5526
5527slowstart <start_time_in_ms>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005528 The "slowstart" parameter for a server accepts a value in milliseconds which
5529 indicates after how long a server which has just come back up will run at
5530 full speed. Just as with every other time-based parameter, it can be entered
5531 in any other explicit unit among { us, ms, s, m, h, d }. The speed grows
5532 linearly from 0 to 100% during this time. The limitation applies to two
5533 parameters :
5534
5535 - maxconn: the number of connections accepted by the server will grow from 1
5536 to 100% of the usual dynamic limit defined by (minconn,maxconn,fullconn).
5537
5538 - weight: when the backend uses a dynamic weighted algorithm, the weight
5539 grows linearly from 1 to 100%. In this case, the weight is updated at every
5540 health-check. For this reason, it is important that the "inter" parameter
5541 is smaller than the "slowstart", in order to maximize the number of steps.
5542
5543 The slowstart never applies when haproxy starts, otherwise it would cause
5544 trouble to running servers. It only applies when a server has been previously
5545 seen as failed.
5546
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005547 Supported in default-server: Yes
5548
Willy Tarreauc6f4ce82009-06-10 11:09:37 +02005549source <addr>[:<pl>[-<ph>]] [usesrc { <addr2>[:<port2>] | client | clientip } ]
5550source <addr>[:<pl>[-<ph>]] [interface <name>] ...
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005551 The "source" parameter sets the source address which will be used when
5552 connecting to the server. It follows the exact same parameters and principle
5553 as the backend "source" keyword, except that it only applies to the server
5554 referencing it. Please consult the "source" keyword for details.
5555
Willy Tarreauc6f4ce82009-06-10 11:09:37 +02005556 Additionally, the "source" statement on a server line allows one to specify a
5557 source port range by indicating the lower and higher bounds delimited by a
5558 dash ('-'). Some operating systems might require a valid IP address when a
5559 source port range is specified. It is permitted to have the same IP/range for
5560 several servers. Doing so makes it possible to bypass the maximum of 64k
5561 total concurrent connections. The limit will then reach 64k connections per
5562 server.
5563
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005564 Supported in default-server: No
5565
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005566track [<proxy>/]<server>
5567 This option enables ability to set the current state of the server by
5568 tracking another one. Only a server with checks enabled can be tracked
5569 so it is not possible for example to track a server that tracks another
5570 one. If <proxy> is omitted the current one is used. If disable-on-404 is
5571 used, it has to be enabled on both proxies.
5572
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005573 Supported in default-server: No
5574
5575weight <weight>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005576 The "weight" parameter is used to adjust the server's weight relative to
5577 other servers. All servers will receive a load proportional to their weight
5578 relative to the sum of all weights, so the higher the weight, the higher the
Willy Tarreau6704d672009-06-15 10:56:05 +02005579 load. The default weight is 1, and the maximal value is 256. A value of 0
5580 means the server will not participate in load-balancing but will still accept
5581 persistent connections. If this parameter is used to distribute the load
5582 according to server's capacity, it is recommended to start with values which
5583 can both grow and shrink, for instance between 10 and 100 to leave enough
5584 room above and below for later adjustments.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005585
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005586 Supported in default-server: Yes
5587
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005588
55896. HTTP header manipulation
5590---------------------------
5591
5592In HTTP mode, it is possible to rewrite, add or delete some of the request and
5593response headers based on regular expressions. It is also possible to block a
5594request or a response if a particular header matches a regular expression,
5595which is enough to stop most elementary protocol attacks, and to protect
5596against information leak from the internal network. But there is a limitation
5597to this : since HAProxy's HTTP engine does not support keep-alive, only headers
5598passed during the first request of a TCP session will be seen. All subsequent
5599headers will be considered data only and not analyzed. Furthermore, HAProxy
5600never touches data contents, it stops analysis at the end of headers.
5601
Willy Tarreau816b9792009-09-15 21:25:21 +02005602There is an exception though. If HAProxy encounters an "Informational Response"
5603(status code 1xx), it is able to process all rsp* rules which can allow, deny,
5604rewrite or delete a header, but it will refuse to add a header to any such
5605messages as this is not HTTP-compliant. The reason for still processing headers
5606in such responses is to stop and/or fix any possible information leak which may
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005607happen, for instance because another downstream equipment would unconditionally
Willy Tarreau816b9792009-09-15 21:25:21 +02005608add a header, or if a server name appears there. When such messages are seen,
5609normal processing still occurs on the next non-informational messages.
5610
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005611This section covers common usage of the following keywords, described in detail
5612in section 4.2 :
5613
5614 - reqadd <string>
5615 - reqallow <search>
5616 - reqiallow <search>
5617 - reqdel <search>
5618 - reqidel <search>
5619 - reqdeny <search>
5620 - reqideny <search>
5621 - reqpass <search>
5622 - reqipass <search>
5623 - reqrep <search> <replace>
5624 - reqirep <search> <replace>
5625 - reqtarpit <search>
5626 - reqitarpit <search>
5627 - rspadd <string>
5628 - rspdel <search>
5629 - rspidel <search>
5630 - rspdeny <search>
5631 - rspideny <search>
5632 - rsprep <search> <replace>
5633 - rspirep <search> <replace>
5634
5635With all these keywords, the same conventions are used. The <search> parameter
5636is a POSIX extended regular expression (regex) which supports grouping through
5637parenthesis (without the backslash). Spaces and other delimiters must be
5638prefixed with a backslash ('\') to avoid confusion with a field delimiter.
5639Other characters may be prefixed with a backslash to change their meaning :
5640
5641 \t for a tab
5642 \r for a carriage return (CR)
5643 \n for a new line (LF)
5644 \ to mark a space and differentiate it from a delimiter
5645 \# to mark a sharp and differentiate it from a comment
5646 \\ to use a backslash in a regex
5647 \\\\ to use a backslash in the text (*2 for regex, *2 for haproxy)
5648 \xXX to write the ASCII hex code XX as in the C language
5649
5650The <replace> parameter contains the string to be used to replace the largest
5651portion of text matching the regex. It can make use of the special characters
5652above, and can reference a substring which is delimited by parenthesis in the
5653regex, by writing a backslash ('\') immediately followed by one digit from 0 to
56549 indicating the group position (0 designating the entire line). This practice
5655is very common to users of the "sed" program.
5656
5657The <string> parameter represents the string which will systematically be added
5658after the last header line. It can also use special character sequences above.
5659
5660Notes related to these keywords :
5661---------------------------------
5662 - these keywords are not always convenient to allow/deny based on header
5663 contents. It is strongly recommended to use ACLs with the "block" keyword
5664 instead, resulting in far more flexible and manageable rules.
5665
5666 - lines are always considered as a whole. It is not possible to reference
5667 a header name only or a value only. This is important because of the way
5668 headers are written (notably the number of spaces after the colon).
5669
5670 - the first line is always considered as a header, which makes it possible to
5671 rewrite or filter HTTP requests URIs or response codes, but in turn makes
5672 it harder to distinguish between headers and request line. The regex prefix
5673 ^[^\ \t]*[\ \t] matches any HTTP method followed by a space, and the prefix
5674 ^[^ \t:]*: matches any header name followed by a colon.
5675
5676 - for performances reasons, the number of characters added to a request or to
5677 a response is limited at build time to values between 1 and 4 kB. This
5678 should normally be far more than enough for most usages. If it is too short
5679 on occasional usages, it is possible to gain some space by removing some
5680 useless headers before adding new ones.
5681
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005682 - keywords beginning with "reqi" and "rspi" are the same as their counterpart
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005683 without the 'i' letter except that they ignore case when matching patterns.
5684
5685 - when a request passes through a frontend then a backend, all req* rules
5686 from the frontend will be evaluated, then all req* rules from the backend
5687 will be evaluated. The reverse path is applied to responses.
5688
5689 - req* statements are applied after "block" statements, so that "block" is
5690 always the first one, but before "use_backend" in order to permit rewriting
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005691 before switching.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005692
5693
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +010056947. Using ACLs and pattern extraction
5695------------------------------------
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005696
5697The use of Access Control Lists (ACL) provides a flexible solution to perform
5698content switching and generally to take decisions based on content extracted
5699from the request, the response or any environmental status. The principle is
5700simple :
5701
5702 - define test criteria with sets of values
5703 - perform actions only if a set of tests is valid
5704
5705The actions generally consist in blocking the request, or selecting a backend.
5706
5707In order to define a test, the "acl" keyword is used. The syntax is :
5708
5709 acl <aclname> <criterion> [flags] [operator] <value> ...
5710
5711This creates a new ACL <aclname> or completes an existing one with new tests.
5712Those tests apply to the portion of request/response specified in <criterion>
5713and may be adjusted with optional flags [flags]. Some criteria also support
5714an operator which may be specified before the set of values. The values are
5715of the type supported by the criterion, and are separated by spaces.
5716
5717ACL names must be formed from upper and lower case letters, digits, '-' (dash),
5718'_' (underscore) , '.' (dot) and ':' (colon). ACL names are case-sensitive,
5719which means that "my_acl" and "My_Acl" are two different ACLs.
5720
5721There is no enforced limit to the number of ACLs. The unused ones do not affect
5722performance, they just consume a small amount of memory.
5723
5724The following ACL flags are currently supported :
5725
5726 -i : ignore case during matching.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005727 -- : force end of flags. Useful when a string looks like one of the flags.
5728
5729Supported types of values are :
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005730
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005731 - integers or integer ranges
5732 - strings
5733 - regular expressions
5734 - IP addresses and networks
5735
5736
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020057377.1. Matching integers
5738----------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005739
5740Matching integers is special in that ranges and operators are permitted. Note
5741that integer matching only applies to positive values. A range is a value
5742expressed with a lower and an upper bound separated with a colon, both of which
5743may be omitted.
5744
5745For instance, "1024:65535" is a valid range to represent a range of
5746unprivileged ports, and "1024:" would also work. "0:1023" is a valid
5747representation of privileged ports, and ":1023" would also work.
5748
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005749As a special case, some ACL functions support decimal numbers which are in fact
5750two integers separated by a dot. This is used with some version checks for
5751instance. All integer properties apply to those decimal numbers, including
5752ranges and operators.
5753
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005754For an easier usage, comparison operators are also supported. Note that using
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005755operators with ranges does not make much sense and is strongly discouraged.
5756Similarly, it does not make much sense to perform order comparisons with a set
5757of values.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005758
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005759Available operators for integer matching are :
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005760
5761 eq : true if the tested value equals at least one value
5762 ge : true if the tested value is greater than or equal to at least one value
5763 gt : true if the tested value is greater than at least one value
5764 le : true if the tested value is less than or equal to at least one value
5765 lt : true if the tested value is less than at least one value
5766
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005767For instance, the following ACL matches any negative Content-Length header :
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005768
5769 acl negative-length hdr_val(content-length) lt 0
5770
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005771This one matches SSL versions between 3.0 and 3.1 (inclusive) :
5772
5773 acl sslv3 req_ssl_ver 3:3.1
5774
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005775
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020057767.2. Matching strings
5777---------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005778
5779String matching applies to verbatim strings as they are passed, with the
5780exception of the backslash ("\") which makes it possible to escape some
5781characters such as the space. If the "-i" flag is passed before the first
5782string, then the matching will be performed ignoring the case. In order
5783to match the string "-i", either set it second, or pass the "--" flag
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005784before the first string. Same applies of course to match the string "--".
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005785
5786
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020057877.3. Matching regular expressions (regexes)
5788-------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005789
5790Just like with string matching, regex matching applies to verbatim strings as
5791they are passed, with the exception of the backslash ("\") which makes it
5792possible to escape some characters such as the space. If the "-i" flag is
5793passed before the first regex, then the matching will be performed ignoring
5794the case. In order to match the string "-i", either set it second, or pass
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005795the "--" flag before the first string. Same principle applies of course to
5796match the string "--".
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005797
5798
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020057997.4. Matching IPv4 addresses
5800----------------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005801
5802IPv4 addresses values can be specified either as plain addresses or with a
5803netmask appended, in which case the IPv4 address matches whenever it is
5804within the network. Plain addresses may also be replaced with a resolvable
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01005805host name, but this practice is generally discouraged as it makes it more
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005806difficult to read and debug configurations. If hostnames are used, you should
5807at least ensure that they are present in /etc/hosts so that the configuration
5808does not depend on any random DNS match at the moment the configuration is
5809parsed.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005810
5811
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020058127.5. Available matching criteria
5813--------------------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005814
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020058157.5.1. Matching at Layer 4 and below
5816------------------------------------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005817
5818A first set of criteria applies to information which does not require any
5819analysis of the request or response contents. Those generally include TCP/IP
5820addresses and ports, as well as internal values independant on the stream.
5821
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005822always_false
5823 This one never matches. All values and flags are ignored. It may be used as
5824 a temporary replacement for another one when adjusting configurations.
5825
5826always_true
5827 This one always matches. All values and flags are ignored. It may be used as
5828 a temporary replacement for another one when adjusting configurations.
5829
5830src <ip_address>
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005831 Applies to the client's IPv4 address. It is usually used to limit access to
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005832 certain resources such as statistics. Note that it is the TCP-level source
5833 address which is used, and not the address of a client behind a proxy.
5834
5835src_port <integer>
5836 Applies to the client's TCP source port. This has a very limited usage.
5837
5838dst <ip_address>
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005839 Applies to the local IPv4 address the client connected to. It can be used to
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005840 switch to a different backend for some alternative addresses.
5841
5842dst_port <integer>
5843 Applies to the local port the client connected to. It can be used to switch
5844 to a different backend for some alternative ports.
5845
5846dst_conn <integer>
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02005847 Applies to the number of currently established connections on the same socket
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005848 including the one being evaluated. It can be used to either return a sorry
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005849 page before hard-blocking, or to use a specific backend to drain new requests
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02005850 when the socket is considered saturated. This offers the ability to assign
5851 different limits to different listening ports or addresses. See also the
5852 "fe_conn" and "be_conn" criteria.
5853
5854fe_conn <integer>
5855fe_conn(frontend) <integer>
5856 Applies to the number of currently established connections on the frontend,
5857 possibly including the connection being evaluated. If no frontend name is
5858 specified, the current one is used. But it is also possible to check another
5859 frontend. It can be used to either return a sorry page before hard-blocking,
5860 or to use a specific backend to drain new requests when the farm is
5861 considered saturated. See also the "dst_conn", "be_conn" and "fe_sess_rate"
5862 criteria.
5863
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki346f76d2010-01-12 21:59:30 +01005864fe_id <integer>
5865 Applies to the fronted's id. Can be used in backends to check from which
5866 frontend it was called.
5867
5868so_id <integer>
5869 Applies to the socket's id. Useful in frontends with many bind keywords.
5870
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02005871be_conn <integer>
5872be_conn(frontend) <integer>
5873 Applies to the number of currently established connections on the backend,
5874 possibly including the connection being evaluated. If no backend name is
5875 specified, the current one is used. But it is also possible to check another
5876 backend. It can be used to use a specific farm when the nominal one is full.
5877 See also the "fe_conn", "queue" and "be_sess_rate" criteria.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005878
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005879nbsrv <integer>
5880nbsrv(backend) <integer>
5881 Returns true when the number of usable servers of either the current backend
5882 or the named backend matches the values or ranges specified. This is used to
5883 switch to an alternate backend when the number of servers is too low to
5884 to handle some load. It is useful to report a failure when combined with
5885 "monitor fail".
5886
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08005887connslots <integer>
5888connslots(backend) <integer>
5889 The basic idea here is to be able to measure the number of connection "slots"
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02005890 still available (connection + queue), so that anything beyond that (intended
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08005891 usage; see "use_backend" keyword) can be redirected to a different backend.
5892
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02005893 'connslots' = number of available server connection slots, + number of
5894 available server queue slots.
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08005895
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02005896 Note that while "fe_conn" may be used, "connslots" comes in especially
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02005897 useful when you have a case of traffic going to one single ip, splitting into
5898 multiple backends (perhaps using acls to do name-based load balancing) and
5899 you want to be able to differentiate between different backends, and their
5900 available "connslots". Also, whereas "nbsrv" only measures servers that are
5901 actually *down*, this acl is more fine-grained and looks into the number of
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02005902 available connection slots as well. See also "queue" and "avg_queue".
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08005903
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02005904 OTHER CAVEATS AND NOTES: at this point in time, the code does not take care
5905 of dynamic connections. Also, if any of the server maxconn, or maxqueue is 0,
5906 then this acl clearly does not make sense, in which case the value returned
5907 will be -1.
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08005908
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02005909queue <integer>
5910queue(frontend) <integer>
5911 Returns the total number of queued connections of the designated backend,
5912 including all the connections in server queues. If no backend name is
5913 specified, the current one is used, but it is also possible to check another
5914 one. This can be used to take actions when queuing goes above a known level,
5915 generally indicating a surge of traffic or a massive slowdown on the servers.
5916 One possible action could be to reject new users but still accept old ones.
5917 See also the "avg_queue", "be_conn", and "be_sess_rate" criteria.
5918
5919avg_queue <integer>
5920avg_queue(frontend) <integer>
5921 Returns the total number of queued connections of the designated backend
5922 divided by the number of active servers. This is very similar to "queue"
5923 except that the size of the farm is considered, in order to give a more
5924 accurate measurement of the time it may take for a new connection to be
5925 processed. The main usage is to return a sorry page to new users when it
5926 becomes certain they will get a degraded service. Note that in the event
5927 there would not be any active server anymore, we would consider twice the
5928 number of queued connections as the measured value. This is a fair estimate,
5929 as we expect one server to get back soon anyway, but we still prefer to send
5930 new traffic to another backend if in better shape. See also the "queue",
5931 "be_conn", and "be_sess_rate" criteria.
5932
Willy Tarreau079ff0a2009-03-05 21:34:28 +01005933fe_sess_rate <integer>
5934fe_sess_rate(frontend) <integer>
5935 Returns true when the session creation rate on the current or the named
5936 frontend matches the specified values or ranges, expressed in new sessions
5937 per second. This is used to limit the connection rate to acceptable ranges in
5938 order to prevent abuse of service at the earliest moment. This can be
5939 combined with layer 4 ACLs in order to force the clients to wait a bit for
5940 the rate to go down below the limit.
5941
5942 Example :
5943 # This frontend limits incoming mails to 10/s with a max of 100
5944 # concurrent connections. We accept any connection below 10/s, and
5945 # force excess clients to wait for 100 ms. Since clients are limited to
5946 # 100 max, there cannot be more than 10 incoming mails per second.
5947 frontend mail
5948 bind :25
5949 mode tcp
5950 maxconn 100
5951 acl too_fast fe_sess_rate ge 10
5952 tcp-request inspect-delay 100ms
5953 tcp-request content accept if ! too_fast
5954 tcp-request content accept if WAIT_END
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005955
Willy Tarreau079ff0a2009-03-05 21:34:28 +01005956be_sess_rate <integer>
5957be_sess_rate(backend) <integer>
5958 Returns true when the sessions creation rate on the backend matches the
5959 specified values or ranges, in number of new sessions per second. This is
5960 used to switch to an alternate backend when an expensive or fragile one
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005961 reaches too high a session rate, or to limit abuse of service (eg. prevent
Willy Tarreau079ff0a2009-03-05 21:34:28 +01005962 sucking of an online dictionary).
5963
5964 Example :
5965 # Redirect to an error page if the dictionary is requested too often
5966 backend dynamic
5967 mode http
5968 acl being_scanned be_sess_rate gt 100
5969 redirect location /denied.html if being_scanned
5970
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005971
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020059727.5.2. Matching contents at Layer 4
5973-----------------------------------
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005974
5975A second set of criteria depends on data found in buffers, but which can change
5976during analysis. This requires that some data has been buffered, for instance
5977through TCP request content inspection. Please see the "tcp-request" keyword
5978for more detailed information on the subject.
5979
5980req_len <integer>
Emeric Brunbede3d02009-06-30 17:54:00 +02005981 Returns true when the length of the data in the request buffer matches the
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005982 specified range. It is important to understand that this test does not
5983 return false as long as the buffer is changing. This means that a check with
5984 equality to zero will almost always immediately match at the beginning of the
5985 session, while a test for more data will wait for that data to come in and
5986 return false only when haproxy is certain that no more data will come in.
5987 This test was designed to be used with TCP request content inspection.
5988
Willy Tarreau2492d5b2009-07-11 00:06:00 +02005989req_proto_http
5990 Returns true when data in the request buffer look like HTTP and correctly
5991 parses as such. It is the same parser as the common HTTP request parser which
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005992 is used so there should be no surprises. This test can be used for instance
Willy Tarreau2492d5b2009-07-11 00:06:00 +02005993 to direct HTTP traffic to a given port and HTTPS traffic to another one
5994 using TCP request content inspection rules.
5995
Emeric Brunbede3d02009-06-30 17:54:00 +02005996req_rdp_cookie <string>
5997req_rdp_cookie(name) <string>
5998 Returns true when data in the request buffer look like the RDP protocol, and
5999 a cookie is present and equal to <string>. By default, any cookie name is
6000 checked, but a specific cookie name can be specified in parenthesis. The
6001 parser only checks for the first cookie, as illustrated in the RDP protocol
6002 specification. The cookie name is case insensitive. This ACL can be useful
6003 with the "MSTS" cookie, as it can contain the user name of the client
6004 connecting to the server if properly configured on the client. This can be
6005 used to restrict access to certain servers to certain users.
6006
6007req_rdp_cookie_cnt <integer>
6008req_rdp_cookie_cnt(name) <integer>
6009 Returns true when the data in the request buffer look like the RDP protocol
6010 and the number of RDP cookies matches the specified range (typically zero or
6011 one). Optionally a specific cookie name can be checked. This is a simple way
6012 of detecting the RDP protocol, as clients generally send the MSTS or MSTSHASH
6013 cookies.
6014
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02006015req_ssl_ver <decimal>
6016 Returns true when data in the request buffer look like SSL, with a protocol
6017 version matching the specified range. Both SSLv2 hello messages and SSLv3
6018 messages are supported. The test tries to be strict enough to avoid being
6019 easily fooled. In particular, it waits for as many bytes as announced in the
6020 message header if this header looks valid (bound to the buffer size). Note
6021 that TLSv1 is announced as SSL version 3.1. This test was designed to be used
6022 with TCP request content inspection.
6023
Willy Tarreaub6fb4202008-07-20 11:18:28 +02006024wait_end
6025 Waits for the end of the analysis period to return true. This may be used in
6026 conjunction with content analysis to avoid returning a wrong verdict early.
6027 It may also be used to delay some actions, such as a delayed reject for some
6028 special addresses. Since it either stops the rules evaluation or immediately
6029 returns true, it is recommended to use this acl as the last one in a rule.
6030 Please note that the default ACL "WAIT_END" is always usable without prior
6031 declaration. This test was designed to be used with TCP request content
6032 inspection.
6033
6034 Examples :
6035 # delay every incoming request by 2 seconds
6036 tcp-request inspect-delay 2s
6037 tcp-request content accept if WAIT_END
6038
6039 # don't immediately tell bad guys they are rejected
6040 tcp-request inspect-delay 10s
6041 acl goodguys src 10.0.0.0/24
6042 acl badguys src 10.0.1.0/24
6043 tcp-request content accept if goodguys
6044 tcp-request content reject if badguys WAIT_END
6045 tcp-request content reject
6046
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02006047
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020060487.5.3. Matching at Layer 7
6049--------------------------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006050
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02006051A third set of criteria applies to information which can be found at the
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006052application layer (layer 7). Those require that a full HTTP request has been
6053read, and are only evaluated then. They may require slightly more CPU resources
6054than the layer 4 ones, but not much since the request and response are indexed.
6055
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006056method <string>
6057 Applies to the method in the HTTP request, eg: "GET". Some predefined ACL
6058 already check for most common methods.
6059
Willy Tarreauc097e322010-01-31 15:54:35 +01006060status <integer>
6061 Applies to the HTTP status code in the HTTP response, eg: "302". It can be
6062 used to act on responses depending on status ranges, for instance, remove
6063 any Location header if the response is not a 3xx.
6064
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006065req_ver <string>
6066 Applies to the version string in the HTTP request, eg: "1.0". Some predefined
6067 ACL already check for versions 1.0 and 1.1.
6068
6069path <string>
6070 Returns true when the path part of the request, which starts at the first
6071 slash and ends before the question mark, equals one of the strings. It may be
6072 used to match known files, such as /favicon.ico.
6073
6074path_beg <string>
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006075 Returns true when the path begins with one of the strings. This can be used
6076 to send certain directory names to alternative backends.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006077
6078path_end <string>
6079 Returns true when the path ends with one of the strings. This may be used to
6080 control file name extension.
6081
6082path_sub <string>
6083 Returns true when the path contains one of the strings. It can be used to
6084 detect particular patterns in paths, such as "../" for example. See also
6085 "path_dir".
6086
6087path_dir <string>
6088 Returns true when one of the strings is found isolated or delimited with
6089 slashes in the path. This is used to perform filename or directory name
6090 matching without the risk of wrong match due to colliding prefixes. See also
6091 "url_dir" and "path_sub".
6092
6093path_dom <string>
6094 Returns true when one of the strings is found isolated or delimited with dots
6095 in the path. This may be used to perform domain name matching in proxy
6096 requests. See also "path_sub" and "url_dom".
6097
6098path_reg <regex>
6099 Returns true when the path matches one of the regular expressions. It can be
6100 used any time, but it is important to remember that regex matching is slower
6101 than other methods. See also "url_reg" and all "path_" criteria.
6102
6103url <string>
6104 Applies to the whole URL passed in the request. The only real use is to match
6105 "*", for which there already is a predefined ACL.
6106
6107url_beg <string>
6108 Returns true when the URL begins with one of the strings. This can be used to
6109 check whether a URL begins with a slash or with a protocol scheme.
6110
6111url_end <string>
6112 Returns true when the URL ends with one of the strings. It has very limited
6113 use. "path_end" should be used instead for filename matching.
6114
6115url_sub <string>
6116 Returns true when the URL contains one of the strings. It can be used to
6117 detect particular patterns in query strings for example. See also "path_sub".
6118
6119url_dir <string>
6120 Returns true when one of the strings is found isolated or delimited with
6121 slashes in the URL. This is used to perform filename or directory name
6122 matching without the risk of wrong match due to colliding prefixes. See also
6123 "path_dir" and "url_sub".
6124
6125url_dom <string>
6126 Returns true when one of the strings is found isolated or delimited with dots
6127 in the URL. This is used to perform domain name matching without the risk of
6128 wrong match due to colliding prefixes. See also "url_sub".
6129
6130url_reg <regex>
6131 Returns true when the URL matches one of the regular expressions. It can be
6132 used any time, but it is important to remember that regex matching is slower
6133 than other methods. See also "path_reg" and all "url_" criteria.
6134
Alexandre Cassen5eb1a902007-11-29 15:43:32 +01006135url_ip <ip_address>
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006136 Applies to the IP address specified in the absolute URI in an HTTP request.
6137 It can be used to prevent access to certain resources such as local network.
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01006138 It is useful with option "http_proxy".
Alexandre Cassen5eb1a902007-11-29 15:43:32 +01006139
6140url_port <integer>
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006141 Applies to the port specified in the absolute URI in an HTTP request. It can
6142 be used to prevent access to certain resources. It is useful with option
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01006143 "http_proxy". Note that if the port is not specified in the request, port 80
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006144 is assumed.
Alexandre Cassen5eb1a902007-11-29 15:43:32 +01006145
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01006146hdr <string>
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006147hdr(header) <string>
6148 Note: all the "hdr*" matching criteria either apply to all headers, or to a
6149 particular header whose name is passed between parenthesis and without any
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006150 space. The header name is not case-sensitive. The header matching complies
6151 with RFC2616, and treats as separate headers all values delimited by commas.
Willy Tarreauc097e322010-01-31 15:54:35 +01006152 Use the shdr() variant for response headers sent by the server.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006153
6154 The "hdr" criteria returns true if any of the headers matching the criteria
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006155 match any of the strings. This can be used to check exact for values. For
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006156 instance, checking that "connection: close" is set :
6157
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006158 hdr(Connection) -i close
Willy Tarreau21d2af32008-02-14 20:25:24 +01006159
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006160hdr_beg <string>
6161hdr_beg(header) <string>
6162 Returns true when one of the headers begins with one of the strings. See
Willy Tarreauc097e322010-01-31 15:54:35 +01006163 "hdr" for more information on header matching. Use the shdr_beg() variant for
6164 response headers sent by the server.
Willy Tarreau21d2af32008-02-14 20:25:24 +01006165
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006166hdr_end <string>
6167hdr_end(header) <string>
6168 Returns true when one of the headers ends with one of the strings. See "hdr"
Willy Tarreauc097e322010-01-31 15:54:35 +01006169 for more information on header matching. Use the shdr_end() variant for
6170 response headers sent by the server.
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01006171
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006172hdr_sub <string>
6173hdr_sub(header) <string>
6174 Returns true when one of the headers contains one of the strings. See "hdr"
Willy Tarreauc097e322010-01-31 15:54:35 +01006175 for more information on header matching. Use the shdr_sub() variant for
6176 response headers sent by the server.
Willy Tarreau5764b382007-11-30 17:46:49 +01006177
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006178hdr_dir <string>
6179hdr_dir(header) <string>
6180 Returns true when one of the headers contains one of the strings either
6181 isolated or delimited by slashes. This is used to perform filename or
6182 directory name matching, and may be used with Referer. See "hdr" for more
Willy Tarreauc097e322010-01-31 15:54:35 +01006183 information on header matching. Use the shdr_dir() variant for response
6184 headers sent by the server.
Willy Tarreau5764b382007-11-30 17:46:49 +01006185
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006186hdr_dom <string>
6187hdr_dom(header) <string>
6188 Returns true when one of the headers contains one of the strings either
6189 isolated or delimited by dots. This is used to perform domain name matching,
6190 and may be used with the Host header. See "hdr" for more information on
Willy Tarreauc097e322010-01-31 15:54:35 +01006191 header matching. Use the shdr_dom() variant for response headers sent by the
6192 server.
Willy Tarreau5764b382007-11-30 17:46:49 +01006193
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006194hdr_reg <regex>
6195hdr_reg(header) <regex>
6196 Returns true when one of the headers matches of the regular expressions. It
6197 can be used at any time, but it is important to remember that regex matching
6198 is slower than other methods. See also other "hdr_" criteria, as well as
Willy Tarreauc097e322010-01-31 15:54:35 +01006199 "hdr" for more information on header matching. Use the shdr_reg() variant for
6200 response headers sent by the server.
Willy Tarreau5764b382007-11-30 17:46:49 +01006201
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006202hdr_val <integer>
6203hdr_val(header) <integer>
6204 Returns true when one of the headers starts with a number which matches the
6205 values or ranges specified. This may be used to limit content-length to
6206 acceptable values for example. See "hdr" for more information on header
Willy Tarreauc097e322010-01-31 15:54:35 +01006207 matching. Use the shdr_val() variant for response headers sent by the server.
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01006208
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006209hdr_cnt <integer>
6210hdr_cnt(header) <integer>
6211 Returns true when the number of occurrence of the specified header matches
6212 the values or ranges specified. It is important to remember that one header
6213 line may count as several headers if it has several values. This is used to
6214 detect presence, absence or abuse of a specific header, as well as to block
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01006215 request smuggling attacks by rejecting requests which contain more than one
Willy Tarreauc097e322010-01-31 15:54:35 +01006216 of certain headers. See "hdr" for more information on header matching. Use
6217 the shdr_cnt() variant for response headers sent by the server.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic8b16fc2008-02-18 01:26:35 +01006218
Willy Tarreau106f9792009-09-19 07:54:16 +02006219hdr_ip <ip_address>
6220hdr_ip(header) <ip_address>
6221 Returns true when one of the headers' values contains an IP address matching
6222 <ip_address>. This is mainly used with headers such as X-Forwarded-For or
Willy Tarreauc097e322010-01-31 15:54:35 +01006223 X-Client-IP. See "hdr" for more information on header matching. Use the
6224 shdr_ip() variant for response headers sent by the server.
Willy Tarreau106f9792009-09-19 07:54:16 +02006225
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01006226http_auth(userlist)
6227http_auth_group(userlist) <group> [<group>]*
6228 Returns true when authentication data received from the client matches
6229 username & password stored on the userlist. It is also possible to
6230 use http_auth_group to check if the user is assigned to at least one
6231 of specified groups.
6232
6233 Currently only http basic auth is supported.
6234
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01006235
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020062367.6. Pre-defined ACLs
6237---------------------
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006238
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006239Some predefined ACLs are hard-coded so that they do not have to be declared in
6240every frontend which needs them. They all have their names in upper case in
6241order to avoid confusion. Their equivalence is provided below. Please note that
6242only the first three ones are not layer 7 based.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006243
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006244ACL name Equivalent to Usage
6245---------------+-----------------------------+---------------------------------
6246TRUE always_true always match
6247FALSE always_false never match
6248LOCALHOST src 127.0.0.1/8 match connection from local host
Willy Tarreau2492d5b2009-07-11 00:06:00 +02006249HTTP req_proto_http match if protocol is valid HTTP
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006250HTTP_1.0 req_ver 1.0 match HTTP version 1.0
6251HTTP_1.1 req_ver 1.1 match HTTP version 1.1
6252METH_CONNECT method CONNECT match HTTP CONNECT method
6253METH_GET method GET HEAD match HTTP GET or HEAD method
6254METH_HEAD method HEAD match HTTP HEAD method
6255METH_OPTIONS method OPTIONS match HTTP OPTIONS method
6256METH_POST method POST match HTTP POST method
6257METH_TRACE method TRACE match HTTP TRACE method
6258HTTP_URL_ABS url_reg ^[^/:]*:// match absolute URL with scheme
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01006259HTTP_URL_SLASH url_beg / match URL beginning with "/"
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006260HTTP_URL_STAR url * match URL equal to "*"
6261HTTP_CONTENT hdr_val(content-length) gt 0 match an existing content-length
Emeric Brunbede3d02009-06-30 17:54:00 +02006262RDP_COOKIE req_rdp_cookie_cnt gt 0 match presence of an RDP cookie
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006263REQ_CONTENT req_len gt 0 match data in the request buffer
6264WAIT_END wait_end wait for end of content analysis
6265---------------+-----------------------------+---------------------------------
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006266
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006267
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020062687.7. Using ACLs to form conditions
6269----------------------------------
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006270
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006271Some actions are only performed upon a valid condition. A condition is a
6272combination of ACLs with operators. 3 operators are supported :
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006273
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006274 - AND (implicit)
6275 - OR (explicit with the "or" keyword or the "||" operator)
6276 - Negation with the exclamation mark ("!")
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006277
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01006278A condition is formed as a disjunctive form:
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006279
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006280 [!]acl1 [!]acl2 ... [!]acln { or [!]acl1 [!]acl2 ... [!]acln } ...
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006281
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006282Such conditions are generally used after an "if" or "unless" statement,
6283indicating when the condition will trigger the action.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006284
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006285For instance, to block HTTP requests to the "*" URL with methods other than
6286"OPTIONS", as well as POST requests without content-length, and GET or HEAD
6287requests with a content-length greater than 0, and finally every request which
6288is not either GET/HEAD/POST/OPTIONS !
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006289
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006290 acl missing_cl hdr_cnt(Content-length) eq 0
6291 block if HTTP_URL_STAR !METH_OPTIONS || METH_POST missing_cl
6292 block if METH_GET HTTP_CONTENT
6293 block unless METH_GET or METH_POST or METH_OPTIONS
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006294
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006295To select a different backend for requests to static contents on the "www" site
6296and to every request on the "img", "video", "download" and "ftp" hosts :
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006297
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006298 acl url_static path_beg /static /images /img /css
6299 acl url_static path_end .gif .png .jpg .css .js
6300 acl host_www hdr_beg(host) -i www
6301 acl host_static hdr_beg(host) -i img. video. download. ftp.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006302
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006303 # now use backend "static" for all static-only hosts, and for static urls
6304 # of host "www". Use backend "www" for the rest.
6305 use_backend static if host_static or host_www url_static
6306 use_backend www if host_www
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006307
Willy Tarreau95fa4692010-02-01 13:05:50 +01006308It is also possible to form rules using "anonymous ACLs". Those are unnamed ACL
6309expressions that are built on the fly without needing to be declared. They must
6310be enclosed between braces, with a space before and after each brace (because
6311the braces must be seen as independant words). Example :
6312
6313 The following rule :
6314
6315 acl missing_cl hdr_cnt(Content-length) eq 0
6316 block if METH_POST missing_cl
6317
6318 Can also be written that way :
6319
6320 block if METH_POST { hdr_cnt(Content-length) eq 0 }
6321
6322It is generally not recommended to use this construct because it's a lot easier
6323to leave errors in the configuration when written that way. However, for very
6324simple rules matching only one source IP address for instance, it can make more
6325sense to use them than to declare ACLs with random names. Another example of
6326good use is the following :
6327
6328 With named ACLs :
6329
6330 acl site_dead nbsrv(dynamic) lt 2
6331 acl site_dead nbsrv(static) lt 2
6332 monitor fail if site_dead
6333
6334 With anonymous ACLs :
6335
6336 monitor fail if { nbsrv(dynamic) lt 2 } || { nbsrv(static) lt 2 }
6337
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006338See section 4.2 for detailed help on the "block" and "use_backend" keywords.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006339
Willy Tarreau5764b382007-11-30 17:46:49 +01006340
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +010063417.8. Pattern extraction
6342-----------------------
6343
6344The stickiness features relies on pattern extraction in the request and
6345response. Sometimes the data needs to be converted first before being stored,
6346for instance converted from ASCII to IP or upper case to lower case.
6347
6348All these operations of data extraction and conversion are defined as
6349"pattern extraction rules". A pattern rule always has the same format. It
6350begins with a single pattern fetch word, potentially followed by a list of
6351arguments within parenthesis then an optional list of transformations. As
6352much as possible, the pattern fetch functions use the same name as their
6353equivalent used in ACLs.
6354
6355The list of currently supported pattern fetch functions is the following :
6356
6357 src This is the source IPv4 address of the client of the session.
6358 It is of type IP and only works with such tables.
6359
6360 dst This is the destination IPv4 address of the session on the
6361 client side, which is the address the client connected to.
6362 It can be useful when running in transparent mode. It is of
6363 typie IP and only works with such tables.
6364
6365 dst_port This is the destination TCP port of the session on the client
6366 side, which is the port the client connected to. This might be
6367 used when running in transparent mode or when assigning dynamic
6368 ports to some clients for a whole application session. It is of
6369 type integer and only works with such tables.
6370
6371
6372The currently available list of transformations include :
6373
6374 lower Convert a string pattern to lower case. This can only be placed
6375 after a string pattern fetch function or after a conversion
6376 function returning a string type. The result is of type string.
6377
6378 upper Convert a string pattern to upper case. This can only be placed
6379 after a string pattern fetch function or after a conversion
6380 function returning a string type. The result is of type string.
6381
Willy Tarreaud31d6eb2010-01-26 18:01:41 +01006382 ipmask(mask) Apply a mask to an IPv4 address, and use the result for lookups
6383 and storage. This can be used to make all hosts within a
6384 certain mask to share the same table entries and as such use
6385 the same server. The mask can be passed in dotted form (eg:
6386 255.255.255.0) or in CIDR form (eg: 24).
6387
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +01006388
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020063898. Logging
6390----------
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01006391
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006392One of HAProxy's strong points certainly lies is its precise logs. It probably
6393provides the finest level of information available for such a product, which is
6394very important for troubleshooting complex environments. Standard information
6395provided in logs include client ports, TCP/HTTP state timers, precise session
6396state at termination and precise termination cause, information about decisions
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01006397to direct traffic to a server, and of course the ability to capture arbitrary
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006398headers.
6399
6400In order to improve administrators reactivity, it offers a great transparency
6401about encountered problems, both internal and external, and it is possible to
6402send logs to different sources at the same time with different level filters :
6403
6404 - global process-level logs (system errors, start/stop, etc..)
6405 - per-instance system and internal errors (lack of resource, bugs, ...)
6406 - per-instance external troubles (servers up/down, max connections)
6407 - per-instance activity (client connections), either at the establishment or
6408 at the termination.
6409
6410The ability to distribute different levels of logs to different log servers
6411allow several production teams to interact and to fix their problems as soon
6412as possible. For example, the system team might monitor system-wide errors,
6413while the application team might be monitoring the up/down for their servers in
6414real time, and the security team might analyze the activity logs with one hour
6415delay.
6416
6417
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020064188.1. Log levels
6419---------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006420
6421TCP and HTTP connections can be logged with informations such as date, time,
6422source IP address, destination address, connection duration, response times,
6423HTTP request, the HTTP return code, number of bytes transmitted, the conditions
6424in which the session ended, and even exchanged cookies values, to track a
6425particular user's problems for example. All messages are sent to up to two
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006426syslog servers. Check the "log" keyword in section 4.2 for more info about log
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006427facilities.
6428
6429
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020064308.2. Log formats
6431----------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006432
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02006433HAProxy supports 4 log formats. Several fields are common between these formats
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006434and will be detailed in the next sections. A few of them may slightly vary with
6435the configuration, due to indicators specific to certain options. The supported
6436formats are the following ones :
6437
6438 - the default format, which is very basic and very rarely used. It only
6439 provides very basic information about the incoming connection at the moment
6440 it is accepted : source IP:port, destination IP:port, and frontend-name.
6441 This mode will eventually disappear so it will not be described to great
6442 extents.
6443
6444 - the TCP format, which is more advanced. This format is enabled when "option
6445 tcplog" is set on the frontend. HAProxy will then usually wait for the
6446 connection to terminate before logging. This format provides much richer
6447 information, such as timers, connection counts, queue size, etc... This
6448 format is recommended for pure TCP proxies.
6449
6450 - the HTTP format, which is the most advanced for HTTP proxying. This format
6451 is enabled when "option httplog" is set on the frontend. It provides the
6452 same information as the TCP format with some HTTP-specific fields such as
6453 the request, the status code, and captures of headers and cookies. This
6454 format is recommended for HTTP proxies.
6455
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02006456 - the CLF HTTP format, which is equivalent to the HTTP format, but with the
6457 fields arranged in the same order as the CLF format. In this mode, all
6458 timers, captures, flags, etc... appear one per field after the end of the
6459 common fields, in the same order they appear in the standard HTTP format.
6460
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006461Next sections will go deeper into details for each of these formats. Format
6462specification will be performed on a "field" basis. Unless stated otherwise, a
6463field is a portion of text delimited by any number of spaces. Since syslog
6464servers are susceptible of inserting fields at the beginning of a line, it is
6465always assumed that the first field is the one containing the process name and
6466identifier.
6467
6468Note : Since log lines may be quite long, the log examples in sections below
6469 might be broken into multiple lines. The example log lines will be
6470 prefixed with 3 closing angle brackets ('>>>') and each time a log is
6471 broken into multiple lines, each non-final line will end with a
6472 backslash ('\') and the next line will start indented by two characters.
6473
6474
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020064758.2.1. Default log format
6476-------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006477
6478This format is used when no specific option is set. The log is emitted as soon
6479as the connection is accepted. One should note that this currently is the only
6480format which logs the request's destination IP and ports.
6481
6482 Example :
6483 listen www
6484 mode http
6485 log global
6486 server srv1 127.0.0.1:8000
6487
6488 >>> Feb 6 12:12:09 localhost \
6489 haproxy[14385]: Connect from 10.0.1.2:33312 to 10.0.3.31:8012 \
6490 (www/HTTP)
6491
6492 Field Format Extract from the example above
6493 1 process_name '[' pid ']:' haproxy[14385]:
6494 2 'Connect from' Connect from
6495 3 source_ip ':' source_port 10.0.1.2:33312
6496 4 'to' to
6497 5 destination_ip ':' destination_port 10.0.3.31:8012
6498 6 '(' frontend_name '/' mode ')' (www/HTTP)
6499
6500Detailed fields description :
6501 - "source_ip" is the IP address of the client which initiated the connection.
6502 - "source_port" is the TCP port of the client which initiated the connection.
6503 - "destination_ip" is the IP address the client connected to.
6504 - "destination_port" is the TCP port the client connected to.
6505 - "frontend_name" is the name of the frontend (or listener) which received
6506 and processed the connection.
6507 - "mode is the mode the frontend is operating (TCP or HTTP).
6508
6509It is advised not to use this deprecated format for newer installations as it
6510will eventually disappear.
6511
6512
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020065138.2.2. TCP log format
6514---------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006515
6516The TCP format is used when "option tcplog" is specified in the frontend, and
6517is the recommended format for pure TCP proxies. It provides a lot of precious
6518information for troubleshooting. Since this format includes timers and byte
6519counts, the log is normally emitted at the end of the session. It can be
6520emitted earlier if "option logasap" is specified, which makes sense in most
6521environments with long sessions such as remote terminals. Sessions which match
6522the "monitor" rules are never logged. It is also possible not to emit logs for
6523sessions for which no data were exchanged between the client and the server, by
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02006524specifying "option dontlognull" in the frontend. Successful connections will
6525not be logged if "option dontlog-normal" is specified in the frontend. A few
6526fields may slightly vary depending on some configuration options, those are
6527marked with a star ('*') after the field name below.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006528
6529 Example :
6530 frontend fnt
6531 mode tcp
6532 option tcplog
6533 log global
6534 default_backend bck
6535
6536 backend bck
6537 server srv1 127.0.0.1:8000
6538
6539 >>> Feb 6 12:12:56 localhost \
6540 haproxy[14387]: 10.0.1.2:33313 [06/Feb/2009:12:12:51.443] fnt \
6541 bck/srv1 0/0/5007 212 -- 0/0/0/0/3 0/0
6542
6543 Field Format Extract from the example above
6544 1 process_name '[' pid ']:' haproxy[14387]:
6545 2 client_ip ':' client_port 10.0.1.2:33313
6546 3 '[' accept_date ']' [06/Feb/2009:12:12:51.443]
6547 4 frontend_name fnt
6548 5 backend_name '/' server_name bck/srv1
6549 6 Tw '/' Tc '/' Tt* 0/0/5007
6550 7 bytes_read* 212
6551 8 termination_state --
6552 9 actconn '/' feconn '/' beconn '/' srv_conn '/' retries* 0/0/0/0/3
6553 10 srv_queue '/' backend_queue 0/0
6554
6555Detailed fields description :
6556 - "client_ip" is the IP address of the client which initiated the TCP
6557 connection to haproxy.
6558
6559 - "client_port" is the TCP port of the client which initiated the connection.
6560
6561 - "accept_date" is the exact date when the connection was received by haproxy
6562 (which might be very slightly different from the date observed on the
6563 network if there was some queuing in the system's backlog). This is usually
6564 the same date which may appear in any upstream firewall's log.
6565
6566 - "frontend_name" is the name of the frontend (or listener) which received
6567 and processed the connection.
6568
6569 - "backend_name" is the name of the backend (or listener) which was selected
6570 to manage the connection to the server. This will be the same as the
6571 frontend if no switching rule has been applied, which is common for TCP
6572 applications.
6573
6574 - "server_name" is the name of the last server to which the connection was
6575 sent, which might differ from the first one if there were connection errors
6576 and a redispatch occurred. Note that this server belongs to the backend
6577 which processed the request. If the connection was aborted before reaching
6578 a server, "<NOSRV>" is indicated instead of a server name.
6579
6580 - "Tw" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting in the various queues.
6581 It can be "-1" if the connection was aborted before reaching the queue.
6582 See "Timers" below for more details.
6583
6584 - "Tc" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting for the connection to
6585 establish to the final server, including retries. It can be "-1" if the
6586 connection was aborted before a connection could be established. See
6587 "Timers" below for more details.
6588
6589 - "Tt" is the total time in milliseconds elapsed between the accept and the
6590 last close. It covers all possible processings. There is one exception, if
6591 "option logasap" was specified, then the time counting stops at the moment
6592 the log is emitted. In this case, a '+' sign is prepended before the value,
6593 indicating that the final one will be larger. See "Timers" below for more
6594 details.
6595
6596 - "bytes_read" is the total number of bytes transmitted from the server to
6597 the client when the log is emitted. If "option logasap" is specified, the
6598 this value will be prefixed with a '+' sign indicating that the final one
6599 may be larger. Please note that this value is a 64-bit counter, so log
6600 analysis tools must be able to handle it without overflowing.
6601
6602 - "termination_state" is the condition the session was in when the session
6603 ended. This indicates the session state, which side caused the end of
6604 session to happen, and for what reason (timeout, error, ...). The normal
6605 flags should be "--", indicating the session was closed by either end with
6606 no data remaining in buffers. See below "Session state at disconnection"
6607 for more details.
6608
6609 - "actconn" is the total number of concurrent connections on the process when
6610 the session was logged. It it useful to detect when some per-process system
6611 limits have been reached. For instance, if actconn is close to 512 when
6612 multiple connection errors occur, chances are high that the system limits
6613 the process to use a maximum of 1024 file descriptors and that all of them
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006614 are used. See section 3 "Global parameters" to find how to tune the system.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006615
6616 - "feconn" is the total number of concurrent connections on the frontend when
6617 the session was logged. It is useful to estimate the amount of resource
6618 required to sustain high loads, and to detect when the frontend's "maxconn"
6619 has been reached. Most often when this value increases by huge jumps, it is
6620 because there is congestion on the backend servers, but sometimes it can be
6621 caused by a denial of service attack.
6622
6623 - "beconn" is the total number of concurrent connections handled by the
6624 backend when the session was logged. It includes the total number of
6625 concurrent connections active on servers as well as the number of
6626 connections pending in queues. It is useful to estimate the amount of
6627 additional servers needed to support high loads for a given application.
6628 Most often when this value increases by huge jumps, it is because there is
6629 congestion on the backend servers, but sometimes it can be caused by a
6630 denial of service attack.
6631
6632 - "srv_conn" is the total number of concurrent connections still active on
6633 the server when the session was logged. It can never exceed the server's
6634 configured "maxconn" parameter. If this value is very often close or equal
6635 to the server's "maxconn", it means that traffic regulation is involved a
6636 lot, meaning that either the server's maxconn value is too low, or that
6637 there aren't enough servers to process the load with an optimal response
6638 time. When only one of the server's "srv_conn" is high, it usually means
6639 that this server has some trouble causing the connections to take longer to
6640 be processed than on other servers.
6641
6642 - "retries" is the number of connection retries experienced by this session
6643 when trying to connect to the server. It must normally be zero, unless a
6644 server is being stopped at the same moment the connection was attempted.
6645 Frequent retries generally indicate either a network problem between
6646 haproxy and the server, or a misconfigured system backlog on the server
6647 preventing new connections from being queued. This field may optionally be
6648 prefixed with a '+' sign, indicating that the session has experienced a
6649 redispatch after the maximal retry count has been reached on the initial
6650 server. In this case, the server name appearing in the log is the one the
6651 connection was redispatched to, and not the first one, though both may
6652 sometimes be the same in case of hashing for instance. So as a general rule
6653 of thumb, when a '+' is present in front of the retry count, this count
6654 should not be attributed to the logged server.
6655
6656 - "srv_queue" is the total number of requests which were processed before
6657 this one in the server queue. It is zero when the request has not gone
6658 through the server queue. It makes it possible to estimate the approximate
6659 server's response time by dividing the time spent in queue by the number of
6660 requests in the queue. It is worth noting that if a session experiences a
6661 redispatch and passes through two server queues, their positions will be
6662 cumulated. A request should not pass through both the server queue and the
6663 backend queue unless a redispatch occurs.
6664
6665 - "backend_queue" is the total number of requests which were processed before
6666 this one in the backend's global queue. It is zero when the request has not
6667 gone through the global queue. It makes it possible to estimate the average
6668 queue length, which easily translates into a number of missing servers when
6669 divided by a server's "maxconn" parameter. It is worth noting that if a
6670 session experiences a redispatch, it may pass twice in the backend's queue,
6671 and then both positions will be cumulated. A request should not pass
6672 through both the server queue and the backend queue unless a redispatch
6673 occurs.
6674
6675
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020066768.2.3. HTTP log format
6677----------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006678
6679The HTTP format is the most complete and the best suited for HTTP proxies. It
6680is enabled by when "option httplog" is specified in the frontend. It provides
6681the same level of information as the TCP format with additional features which
6682are specific to the HTTP protocol. Just like the TCP format, the log is usually
6683emitted at the end of the session, unless "option logasap" is specified, which
6684generally only makes sense for download sites. A session which matches the
6685"monitor" rules will never logged. It is also possible not to log sessions for
6686which no data were sent by the client by specifying "option dontlognull" in the
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02006687frontend. Successful connections will not be logged if "option dontlog-normal"
6688is specified in the frontend.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006689
6690Most fields are shared with the TCP log, some being different. A few fields may
6691slightly vary depending on some configuration options. Those ones are marked
6692with a star ('*') after the field name below.
6693
6694 Example :
6695 frontend http-in
6696 mode http
6697 option httplog
6698 log global
6699 default_backend bck
6700
6701 backend static
6702 server srv1 127.0.0.1:8000
6703
6704 >>> Feb 6 12:14:14 localhost \
6705 haproxy[14389]: 10.0.1.2:33317 [06/Feb/2009:12:14:14.655] http-in \
6706 static/srv1 10/0/30/69/109 200 2750 - - ---- 1/1/1/1/0 0/0 {1wt.eu} \
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01006707 {} "GET /index.html HTTP/1.1"
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006708
6709 Field Format Extract from the example above
6710 1 process_name '[' pid ']:' haproxy[14389]:
6711 2 client_ip ':' client_port 10.0.1.2:33317
6712 3 '[' accept_date ']' [06/Feb/2009:12:14:14.655]
6713 4 frontend_name http-in
6714 5 backend_name '/' server_name static/srv1
6715 6 Tq '/' Tw '/' Tc '/' Tr '/' Tt* 10/0/30/69/109
6716 7 status_code 200
6717 8 bytes_read* 2750
6718 9 captured_request_cookie -
6719 10 captured_response_cookie -
6720 11 termination_state ----
6721 12 actconn '/' feconn '/' beconn '/' srv_conn '/' retries* 1/1/1/1/0
6722 13 srv_queue '/' backend_queue 0/0
6723 14 '{' captured_request_headers* '}' {haproxy.1wt.eu}
6724 15 '{' captured_response_headers* '}' {}
6725 16 '"' http_request '"' "GET /index.html HTTP/1.1"
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01006726
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006727
6728Detailed fields description :
6729 - "client_ip" is the IP address of the client which initiated the TCP
6730 connection to haproxy.
6731
6732 - "client_port" is the TCP port of the client which initiated the connection.
6733
6734 - "accept_date" is the exact date when the TCP connection was received by
6735 haproxy (which might be very slightly different from the date observed on
6736 the network if there was some queuing in the system's backlog). This is
6737 usually the same date which may appear in any upstream firewall's log. This
6738 does not depend on the fact that the client has sent the request or not.
6739
6740 - "frontend_name" is the name of the frontend (or listener) which received
6741 and processed the connection.
6742
6743 - "backend_name" is the name of the backend (or listener) which was selected
6744 to manage the connection to the server. This will be the same as the
6745 frontend if no switching rule has been applied.
6746
6747 - "server_name" is the name of the last server to which the connection was
6748 sent, which might differ from the first one if there were connection errors
6749 and a redispatch occurred. Note that this server belongs to the backend
6750 which processed the request. If the request was aborted before reaching a
6751 server, "<NOSRV>" is indicated instead of a server name. If the request was
6752 intercepted by the stats subsystem, "<STATS>" is indicated instead.
6753
6754 - "Tq" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting for the client to send
6755 a full HTTP request, not counting data. It can be "-1" if the connection
6756 was aborted before a complete request could be received. It should always
6757 be very small because a request generally fits in one single packet. Large
6758 times here generally indicate network trouble between the client and
6759 haproxy. See "Timers" below for more details.
6760
6761 - "Tw" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting in the various queues.
6762 It can be "-1" if the connection was aborted before reaching the queue.
6763 See "Timers" below for more details.
6764
6765 - "Tc" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting for the connection to
6766 establish to the final server, including retries. It can be "-1" if the
6767 request was aborted before a connection could be established. See "Timers"
6768 below for more details.
6769
6770 - "Tr" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting for the server to send
6771 a full HTTP response, not counting data. It can be "-1" if the request was
6772 aborted before a complete response could be received. It generally matches
6773 the server's processing time for the request, though it may be altered by
6774 the amount of data sent by the client to the server. Large times here on
6775 "GET" requests generally indicate an overloaded server. See "Timers" below
6776 for more details.
6777
6778 - "Tt" is the total time in milliseconds elapsed between the accept and the
6779 last close. It covers all possible processings. There is one exception, if
6780 "option logasap" was specified, then the time counting stops at the moment
6781 the log is emitted. In this case, a '+' sign is prepended before the value,
6782 indicating that the final one will be larger. See "Timers" below for more
6783 details.
6784
6785 - "status_code" is the HTTP status code returned to the client. This status
6786 is generally set by the server, but it might also be set by haproxy when
6787 the server cannot be reached or when its response is blocked by haproxy.
6788
6789 - "bytes_read" is the total number of bytes transmitted to the client when
6790 the log is emitted. This does include HTTP headers. If "option logasap" is
6791 specified, the this value will be prefixed with a '+' sign indicating that
6792 the final one may be larger. Please note that this value is a 64-bit
6793 counter, so log analysis tools must be able to handle it without
6794 overflowing.
6795
6796 - "captured_request_cookie" is an optional "name=value" entry indicating that
6797 the client had this cookie in the request. The cookie name and its maximum
6798 length are defined by the "capture cookie" statement in the frontend
6799 configuration. The field is a single dash ('-') when the option is not
6800 set. Only one cookie may be captured, it is generally used to track session
6801 ID exchanges between a client and a server to detect session crossing
6802 between clients due to application bugs. For more details, please consult
6803 the section "Capturing HTTP headers and cookies" below.
6804
6805 - "captured_response_cookie" is an optional "name=value" entry indicating
6806 that the server has returned a cookie with its response. The cookie name
6807 and its maximum length are defined by the "capture cookie" statement in the
6808 frontend configuration. The field is a single dash ('-') when the option is
6809 not set. Only one cookie may be captured, it is generally used to track
6810 session ID exchanges between a client and a server to detect session
6811 crossing between clients due to application bugs. For more details, please
6812 consult the section "Capturing HTTP headers and cookies" below.
6813
6814 - "termination_state" is the condition the session was in when the session
6815 ended. This indicates the session state, which side caused the end of
6816 session to happen, for what reason (timeout, error, ...), just like in TCP
6817 logs, and information about persistence operations on cookies in the last
6818 two characters. The normal flags should begin with "--", indicating the
6819 session was closed by either end with no data remaining in buffers. See
6820 below "Session state at disconnection" for more details.
6821
6822 - "actconn" is the total number of concurrent connections on the process when
6823 the session was logged. It it useful to detect when some per-process system
6824 limits have been reached. For instance, if actconn is close to 512 or 1024
6825 when multiple connection errors occur, chances are high that the system
6826 limits the process to use a maximum of 1024 file descriptors and that all
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006827 of them are used. See section 3 "Global parameters" to find how to tune the
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006828 system.
6829
6830 - "feconn" is the total number of concurrent connections on the frontend when
6831 the session was logged. It is useful to estimate the amount of resource
6832 required to sustain high loads, and to detect when the frontend's "maxconn"
6833 has been reached. Most often when this value increases by huge jumps, it is
6834 because there is congestion on the backend servers, but sometimes it can be
6835 caused by a denial of service attack.
6836
6837 - "beconn" is the total number of concurrent connections handled by the
6838 backend when the session was logged. It includes the total number of
6839 concurrent connections active on servers as well as the number of
6840 connections pending in queues. It is useful to estimate the amount of
6841 additional servers needed to support high loads for a given application.
6842 Most often when this value increases by huge jumps, it is because there is
6843 congestion on the backend servers, but sometimes it can be caused by a
6844 denial of service attack.
6845
6846 - "srv_conn" is the total number of concurrent connections still active on
6847 the server when the session was logged. It can never exceed the server's
6848 configured "maxconn" parameter. If this value is very often close or equal
6849 to the server's "maxconn", it means that traffic regulation is involved a
6850 lot, meaning that either the server's maxconn value is too low, or that
6851 there aren't enough servers to process the load with an optimal response
6852 time. When only one of the server's "srv_conn" is high, it usually means
6853 that this server has some trouble causing the requests to take longer to be
6854 processed than on other servers.
6855
6856 - "retries" is the number of connection retries experienced by this session
6857 when trying to connect to the server. It must normally be zero, unless a
6858 server is being stopped at the same moment the connection was attempted.
6859 Frequent retries generally indicate either a network problem between
6860 haproxy and the server, or a misconfigured system backlog on the server
6861 preventing new connections from being queued. This field may optionally be
6862 prefixed with a '+' sign, indicating that the session has experienced a
6863 redispatch after the maximal retry count has been reached on the initial
6864 server. In this case, the server name appearing in the log is the one the
6865 connection was redispatched to, and not the first one, though both may
6866 sometimes be the same in case of hashing for instance. So as a general rule
6867 of thumb, when a '+' is present in front of the retry count, this count
6868 should not be attributed to the logged server.
6869
6870 - "srv_queue" is the total number of requests which were processed before
6871 this one in the server queue. It is zero when the request has not gone
6872 through the server queue. It makes it possible to estimate the approximate
6873 server's response time by dividing the time spent in queue by the number of
6874 requests in the queue. It is worth noting that if a session experiences a
6875 redispatch and passes through two server queues, their positions will be
6876 cumulated. A request should not pass through both the server queue and the
6877 backend queue unless a redispatch occurs.
6878
6879 - "backend_queue" is the total number of requests which were processed before
6880 this one in the backend's global queue. It is zero when the request has not
6881 gone through the global queue. It makes it possible to estimate the average
6882 queue length, which easily translates into a number of missing servers when
6883 divided by a server's "maxconn" parameter. It is worth noting that if a
6884 session experiences a redispatch, it may pass twice in the backend's queue,
6885 and then both positions will be cumulated. A request should not pass
6886 through both the server queue and the backend queue unless a redispatch
6887 occurs.
6888
6889 - "captured_request_headers" is a list of headers captured in the request due
6890 to the presence of the "capture request header" statement in the frontend.
6891 Multiple headers can be captured, they will be delimited by a vertical bar
6892 ('|'). When no capture is enabled, the braces do not appear, causing a
6893 shift of remaining fields. It is important to note that this field may
6894 contain spaces, and that using it requires a smarter log parser than when
6895 it's not used. Please consult the section "Capturing HTTP headers and
6896 cookies" below for more details.
6897
6898 - "captured_response_headers" is a list of headers captured in the response
6899 due to the presence of the "capture response header" statement in the
6900 frontend. Multiple headers can be captured, they will be delimited by a
6901 vertical bar ('|'). When no capture is enabled, the braces do not appear,
6902 causing a shift of remaining fields. It is important to note that this
6903 field may contain spaces, and that using it requires a smarter log parser
6904 than when it's not used. Please consult the section "Capturing HTTP headers
6905 and cookies" below for more details.
6906
6907 - "http_request" is the complete HTTP request line, including the method,
6908 request and HTTP version string. Non-printable characters are encoded (see
6909 below the section "Non-printable characters"). This is always the last
6910 field, and it is always delimited by quotes and is the only one which can
6911 contain quotes. If new fields are added to the log format, they will be
6912 added before this field. This field might be truncated if the request is
6913 huge and does not fit in the standard syslog buffer (1024 characters). This
6914 is the reason why this field must always remain the last one.
6915
6916
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020069178.3. Advanced logging options
6918-----------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006919
6920Some advanced logging options are often looked for but are not easy to find out
6921just by looking at the various options. Here is an entry point for the few
6922options which can enable better logging. Please refer to the keywords reference
6923for more information about their usage.
6924
6925
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020069268.3.1. Disabling logging of external tests
6927------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006928
6929It is quite common to have some monitoring tools perform health checks on
6930haproxy. Sometimes it will be a layer 3 load-balancer such as LVS or any
6931commercial load-balancer, and sometimes it will simply be a more complete
6932monitoring system such as Nagios. When the tests are very frequent, users often
6933ask how to disable logging for those checks. There are three possibilities :
6934
6935 - if connections come from everywhere and are just TCP probes, it is often
6936 desired to simply disable logging of connections without data exchange, by
6937 setting "option dontlognull" in the frontend. It also disables logging of
6938 port scans, which may or may not be desired.
6939
6940 - if the connection come from a known source network, use "monitor-net" to
6941 declare this network as monitoring only. Any host in this network will then
6942 only be able to perform health checks, and their requests will not be
6943 logged. This is generally appropriate to designate a list of equipments
6944 such as other load-balancers.
6945
6946 - if the tests are performed on a known URI, use "monitor-uri" to declare
6947 this URI as dedicated to monitoring. Any host sending this request will
6948 only get the result of a health-check, and the request will not be logged.
6949
6950
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020069518.3.2. Logging before waiting for the session to terminate
6952----------------------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006953
6954The problem with logging at end of connection is that you have no clue about
6955what is happening during very long sessions, such as remote terminal sessions
6956or large file downloads. This problem can be worked around by specifying
6957"option logasap" in the frontend. Haproxy will then log as soon as possible,
6958just before data transfer begins. This means that in case of TCP, it will still
6959log the connection status to the server, and in case of HTTP, it will log just
6960after processing the server headers. In this case, the number of bytes reported
6961is the number of header bytes sent to the client. In order to avoid confusion
6962with normal logs, the total time field and the number of bytes are prefixed
6963with a '+' sign which means that real numbers are certainly larger.
6964
6965
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020069668.3.3. Raising log level upon errors
6967------------------------------------
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02006968
6969Sometimes it is more convenient to separate normal traffic from errors logs,
6970for instance in order to ease error monitoring from log files. When the option
6971"log-separate-errors" is used, connections which experience errors, timeouts,
6972retries, redispatches or HTTP status codes 5xx will see their syslog level
6973raised from "info" to "err". This will help a syslog daemon store the log in
6974a separate file. It is very important to keep the errors in the normal traffic
6975file too, so that log ordering is not altered. You should also be careful if
6976you already have configured your syslog daemon to store all logs higher than
6977"notice" in an "admin" file, because the "err" level is higher than "notice".
6978
6979
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020069808.3.4. Disabling logging of successful connections
6981--------------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02006982
6983Although this may sound strange at first, some large sites have to deal with
6984multiple thousands of logs per second and are experiencing difficulties keeping
6985them intact for a long time or detecting errors within them. If the option
6986"dontlog-normal" is set on the frontend, all normal connections will not be
6987logged. In this regard, a normal connection is defined as one without any
6988error, timeout, retry nor redispatch. In HTTP, the status code is checked too,
6989and a response with a status 5xx is not considered normal and will be logged
6990too. Of course, doing is is really discouraged as it will remove most of the
6991useful information from the logs. Do this only if you have no other
6992alternative.
6993
6994
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020069958.4. Timing events
6996------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006997
6998Timers provide a great help in troubleshooting network problems. All values are
6999reported in milliseconds (ms). These timers should be used in conjunction with
7000the session termination flags. In TCP mode with "option tcplog" set on the
7001frontend, 3 control points are reported under the form "Tw/Tc/Tt", and in HTTP
7002mode, 5 control points are reported under the form "Tq/Tw/Tc/Tr/Tt" :
7003
7004 - Tq: total time to get the client request (HTTP mode only). It's the time
7005 elapsed between the moment the client connection was accepted and the
7006 moment the proxy received the last HTTP header. The value "-1" indicates
7007 that the end of headers (empty line) has never been seen. This happens when
7008 the client closes prematurely or times out.
7009
7010 - Tw: total time spent in the queues waiting for a connection slot. It
7011 accounts for backend queue as well as the server queues, and depends on the
7012 queue size, and the time needed for the server to complete previous
7013 requests. The value "-1" means that the request was killed before reaching
7014 the queue, which is generally what happens with invalid or denied requests.
7015
7016 - Tc: total time to establish the TCP connection to the server. It's the time
7017 elapsed between the moment the proxy sent the connection request, and the
7018 moment it was acknowledged by the server, or between the TCP SYN packet and
7019 the matching SYN/ACK packet in return. The value "-1" means that the
7020 connection never established.
7021
7022 - Tr: server response time (HTTP mode only). It's the time elapsed between
7023 the moment the TCP connection was established to the server and the moment
7024 the server sent its complete response headers. It purely shows its request
7025 processing time, without the network overhead due to the data transmission.
7026 It is worth noting that when the client has data to send to the server, for
7027 instance during a POST request, the time already runs, and this can distort
7028 apparent response time. For this reason, it's generally wise not to trust
7029 too much this field for POST requests initiated from clients behind an
7030 untrusted network. A value of "-1" here means that the last the response
7031 header (empty line) was never seen, most likely because the server timeout
7032 stroke before the server managed to process the request.
7033
7034 - Tt: total session duration time, between the moment the proxy accepted it
7035 and the moment both ends were closed. The exception is when the "logasap"
7036 option is specified. In this case, it only equals (Tq+Tw+Tc+Tr), and is
7037 prefixed with a '+' sign. From this field, we can deduce "Td", the data
7038 transmission time, by substracting other timers when valid :
7039
7040 Td = Tt - (Tq + Tw + Tc + Tr)
7041
7042 Timers with "-1" values have to be excluded from this equation. In TCP
7043 mode, "Tq" and "Tr" have to be excluded too. Note that "Tt" can never be
7044 negative.
7045
7046These timers provide precious indications on trouble causes. Since the TCP
7047protocol defines retransmit delays of 3, 6, 12... seconds, we know for sure
7048that timers close to multiples of 3s are nearly always related to lost packets
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007049due to network problems (wires, negotiation, congestion). Moreover, if "Tt" is
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007050close to a timeout value specified in the configuration, it often means that a
7051session has been aborted on timeout.
7052
7053Most common cases :
7054
7055 - If "Tq" is close to 3000, a packet has probably been lost between the
7056 client and the proxy. This is very rare on local networks but might happen
7057 when clients are on far remote networks and send large requests. It may
7058 happen that values larger than usual appear here without any network cause.
7059 Sometimes, during an attack or just after a resource starvation has ended,
7060 haproxy may accept thousands of connections in a few milliseconds. The time
7061 spent accepting these connections will inevitably slightly delay processing
7062 of other connections, and it can happen that request times in the order of
7063 a few tens of milliseconds are measured after a few thousands of new
7064 connections have been accepted at once.
7065
7066 - If "Tc" is close to 3000, a packet has probably been lost between the
7067 server and the proxy during the server connection phase. This value should
7068 always be very low, such as 1 ms on local networks and less than a few tens
7069 of ms on remote networks.
7070
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02007071 - If "Tr" is nearly always lower than 3000 except some rare values which seem
7072 to be the average majored by 3000, there are probably some packets lost
7073 between the proxy and the server.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007074
7075 - If "Tt" is large even for small byte counts, it generally is because
7076 neither the client nor the server decides to close the connection, for
7077 instance because both have agreed on a keep-alive connection mode. In order
7078 to solve this issue, it will be needed to specify "option httpclose" on
7079 either the frontend or the backend. If the problem persists, it means that
7080 the server ignores the "close" connection mode and expects the client to
7081 close. Then it will be required to use "option forceclose". Having the
7082 smallest possible 'Tt' is important when connection regulation is used with
7083 the "maxconn" option on the servers, since no new connection will be sent
7084 to the server until another one is released.
7085
7086Other noticeable HTTP log cases ('xx' means any value to be ignored) :
7087
7088 Tq/Tw/Tc/Tr/+Tt The "option logasap" is present on the frontend and the log
7089 was emitted before the data phase. All the timers are valid
7090 except "Tt" which is shorter than reality.
7091
7092 -1/xx/xx/xx/Tt The client was not able to send a complete request in time
7093 or it aborted too early. Check the session termination flags
7094 then "timeout http-request" and "timeout client" settings.
7095
7096 Tq/-1/xx/xx/Tt It was not possible to process the request, maybe because
7097 servers were out of order, because the request was invalid
7098 or forbidden by ACL rules. Check the session termination
7099 flags.
7100
7101 Tq/Tw/-1/xx/Tt The connection could not establish on the server. Either it
7102 actively refused it or it timed out after Tt-(Tq+Tw) ms.
7103 Check the session termination flags, then check the
7104 "timeout connect" setting. Note that the tarpit action might
7105 return similar-looking patterns, with "Tw" equal to the time
7106 the client connection was maintained open.
7107
7108 Tq/Tw/Tc/-1/Tt The server has accepted the connection but did not return
7109 a complete response in time, or it closed its connexion
7110 unexpectedly after Tt-(Tq+Tw+Tc) ms. Check the session
7111 termination flags, then check the "timeout server" setting.
7112
7113
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020071148.5. Session state at disconnection
7115-----------------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007116
7117TCP and HTTP logs provide a session termination indicator in the
7118"termination_state" field, just before the number of active connections. It is
71192-characters long in TCP mode, and is extended to 4 characters in HTTP mode,
7120each of which has a special meaning :
7121
7122 - On the first character, a code reporting the first event which caused the
7123 session to terminate :
7124
7125 C : the TCP session was unexpectedly aborted by the client.
7126
7127 S : the TCP session was unexpectedly aborted by the server, or the
7128 server explicitly refused it.
7129
7130 P : the session was prematurely aborted by the proxy, because of a
7131 connection limit enforcement, because a DENY filter was matched,
7132 because of a security check which detected and blocked a dangerous
7133 error in server response which might have caused information leak
7134 (eg: cacheable cookie), or because the response was processed by
7135 the proxy (redirect, stats, etc...).
7136
7137 R : a resource on the proxy has been exhausted (memory, sockets, source
7138 ports, ...). Usually, this appears during the connection phase, and
7139 system logs should contain a copy of the precise error. If this
7140 happens, it must be considered as a very serious anomaly which
7141 should be fixed as soon as possible by any means.
7142
7143 I : an internal error was identified by the proxy during a self-check.
7144 This should NEVER happen, and you are encouraged to report any log
7145 containing this, because this would almost certainly be a bug. It
7146 would be wise to preventively restart the process after such an
7147 event too, in case it would be caused by memory corruption.
7148
7149 c : the client-side timeout expired while waiting for the client to
7150 send or receive data.
7151
7152 s : the server-side timeout expired while waiting for the server to
7153 send or receive data.
7154
7155 - : normal session completion, both the client and the server closed
7156 with nothing left in the buffers.
7157
7158 - on the second character, the TCP or HTTP session state when it was closed :
7159
7160 R : th proxy was waiting for a complete, valid REQUEST from the client
7161 (HTTP mode only). Nothing was sent to any server.
7162
7163 Q : the proxy was waiting in the QUEUE for a connection slot. This can
7164 only happen when servers have a 'maxconn' parameter set. It can
7165 also happen in the global queue after a redispatch consecutive to
7166 a failed attempt to connect to a dying server. If no redispatch is
7167 reported, then no connection attempt was made to any server.
7168
7169 C : the proxy was waiting for the CONNECTION to establish on the
7170 server. The server might at most have noticed a connection attempt.
7171
7172 H : the proxy was waiting for complete, valid response HEADERS from the
7173 server (HTTP only).
7174
7175 D : the session was in the DATA phase.
7176
7177 L : the proxy was still transmitting LAST data to the client while the
7178 server had already finished. This one is very rare as it can only
7179 happen when the client dies while receiving the last packets.
7180
7181 T : the request was tarpitted. It has been held open with the client
7182 during the whole "timeout tarpit" duration or until the client
7183 closed, both of which will be reported in the "Tw" timer.
7184
7185 - : normal session completion after end of data transfer.
7186
7187 - the third character tells whether the persistence cookie was provided by
7188 the client (only in HTTP mode) :
7189
7190 N : the client provided NO cookie. This is usually the case for new
7191 visitors, so counting the number of occurrences of this flag in the
7192 logs generally indicate a valid trend for the site frequentation.
7193
7194 I : the client provided an INVALID cookie matching no known server.
7195 This might be caused by a recent configuration change, mixed
7196 cookies between HTTP/HTTPS sites, or an attack.
7197
7198 D : the client provided a cookie designating a server which was DOWN,
7199 so either "option persist" was used and the client was sent to
7200 this server, or it was not set and the client was redispatched to
7201 another server.
7202
7203 V : the client provided a valid cookie, and was sent to the associated
7204 server.
7205
7206 - : does not apply (no cookie set in configuration).
7207
7208 - the last character reports what operations were performed on the persistence
7209 cookie returned by the server (only in HTTP mode) :
7210
7211 N : NO cookie was provided by the server, and none was inserted either.
7212
7213 I : no cookie was provided by the server, and the proxy INSERTED one.
7214 Note that in "cookie insert" mode, if the server provides a cookie,
7215 it will still be overwritten and reported as "I" here.
7216
7217 P : a cookie was PROVIDED by the server and transmitted as-is.
7218
7219 R : the cookie provided by the server was REWRITTEN by the proxy, which
7220 happens in "cookie rewrite" or "cookie prefix" modes.
7221
7222 D : the cookie provided by the server was DELETED by the proxy.
7223
7224 - : does not apply (no cookie set in configuration).
7225
7226The combination of the two first flags give a lot of information about what was
7227happening when the session terminated, and why it did terminate. It can be
7228helpful to detect server saturation, network troubles, local system resource
7229starvation, attacks, etc...
7230
7231The most common termination flags combinations are indicated below. They are
7232alphabetically sorted, with the lowercase set just after the upper case for
7233easier finding and understanding.
7234
7235 Flags Reason
7236
7237 -- Normal termination.
7238
7239 CC The client aborted before the connection could be established to the
7240 server. This can happen when haproxy tries to connect to a recently
7241 dead (or unchecked) server, and the client aborts while haproxy is
7242 waiting for the server to respond or for "timeout connect" to expire.
7243
7244 CD The client unexpectedly aborted during data transfer. This can be
7245 caused by a browser crash, by an intermediate equipment between the
7246 client and haproxy which decided to actively break the connection,
7247 by network routing issues between the client and haproxy, or by a
7248 keep-alive session between the server and the client terminated first
7249 by the client.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007250
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007251 cD The client did not send nor acknowledge any data for as long as the
7252 "timeout client" delay. This is often caused by network failures on
7253 the client side, or the client simply leaving the net uncleanly.
7254
7255 CH The client aborted while waiting for the server to start responding.
7256 It might be the server taking too long to respond or the client
7257 clicking the 'Stop' button too fast.
7258
7259 cH The "timeout client" stroke while waiting for client data during a
7260 POST request. This is sometimes caused by too large TCP MSS values
7261 for PPPoE networks which cannot transport full-sized packets. It can
7262 also happen when client timeout is smaller than server timeout and
7263 the server takes too long to respond.
7264
7265 CQ The client aborted while its session was queued, waiting for a server
7266 with enough empty slots to accept it. It might be that either all the
7267 servers were saturated or that the assigned server was taking too
7268 long a time to respond.
7269
7270 CR The client aborted before sending a full HTTP request. Most likely
7271 the request was typed by hand using a telnet client, and aborted
7272 too early. The HTTP status code is likely a 400 here. Sometimes this
7273 might also be caused by an IDS killing the connection between haproxy
7274 and the client.
7275
7276 cR The "timeout http-request" stroke before the client sent a full HTTP
7277 request. This is sometimes caused by too large TCP MSS values on the
7278 client side for PPPoE networks which cannot transport full-sized
7279 packets, or by clients sending requests by hand and not typing fast
7280 enough, or forgetting to enter the empty line at the end of the
7281 request. The HTTP status code is likely a 408 here.
7282
7283 CT The client aborted while its session was tarpitted. It is important to
7284 check if this happens on valid requests, in order to be sure that no
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02007285 wrong tarpit rules have been written. If a lot of them happen, it
7286 might make sense to lower the "timeout tarpit" value to something
7287 closer to the average reported "Tw" timer, in order not to consume
7288 resources for just a few attackers.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007289
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007290 SC The server or an equipment between it and haproxy explicitly refused
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007291 the TCP connection (the proxy received a TCP RST or an ICMP message
7292 in return). Under some circumstances, it can also be the network
7293 stack telling the proxy that the server is unreachable (eg: no route,
7294 or no ARP response on local network). When this happens in HTTP mode,
7295 the status code is likely a 502 or 503 here.
7296
7297 sC The "timeout connect" stroke before a connection to the server could
7298 complete. When this happens in HTTP mode, the status code is likely a
7299 503 or 504 here.
7300
7301 SD The connection to the server died with an error during the data
7302 transfer. This usually means that haproxy has received an RST from
7303 the server or an ICMP message from an intermediate equipment while
7304 exchanging data with the server. This can be caused by a server crash
7305 or by a network issue on an intermediate equipment.
7306
7307 sD The server did not send nor acknowledge any data for as long as the
7308 "timeout server" setting during the data phase. This is often caused
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007309 by too short timeouts on L4 equipments before the server (firewalls,
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007310 load-balancers, ...), as well as keep-alive sessions maintained
7311 between the client and the server expiring first on haproxy.
7312
7313 SH The server aborted before sending its full HTTP response headers, or
7314 it crashed while processing the request. Since a server aborting at
7315 this moment is very rare, it would be wise to inspect its logs to
7316 control whether it crashed and why. The logged request may indicate a
7317 small set of faulty requests, demonstrating bugs in the application.
7318 Sometimes this might also be caused by an IDS killing the connection
7319 between haproxy and the server.
7320
7321 sH The "timeout server" stroke before the server could return its
7322 response headers. This is the most common anomaly, indicating too
7323 long transactions, probably caused by server or database saturation.
7324 The immediate workaround consists in increasing the "timeout server"
7325 setting, but it is important to keep in mind that the user experience
7326 will suffer from these long response times. The only long term
7327 solution is to fix the application.
7328
7329 sQ The session spent too much time in queue and has been expired. See
7330 the "timeout queue" and "timeout connect" settings to find out how to
7331 fix this if it happens too often. If it often happens massively in
7332 short periods, it may indicate general problems on the affected
7333 servers due to I/O or database congestion, or saturation caused by
7334 external attacks.
7335
7336 PC The proxy refused to establish a connection to the server because the
7337 process' socket limit has been reached while attempting to connect.
7338 The global "maxconn" parameter may be increased in the configuration
7339 so that it does not happen anymore. This status is very rare and
7340 might happen when the global "ulimit-n" parameter is forced by hand.
7341
7342 PH The proxy blocked the server's response, because it was invalid,
7343 incomplete, dangerous (cache control), or matched a security filter.
7344 In any case, an HTTP 502 error is sent to the client. One possible
7345 cause for this error is an invalid syntax in an HTTP header name
7346 containing unauthorized characters.
7347
7348 PR The proxy blocked the client's HTTP request, either because of an
7349 invalid HTTP syntax, in which case it returned an HTTP 400 error to
7350 the client, or because a deny filter matched, in which case it
7351 returned an HTTP 403 error.
7352
7353 PT The proxy blocked the client's request and has tarpitted its
7354 connection before returning it a 500 server error. Nothing was sent
7355 to the server. The connection was maintained open for as long as
7356 reported by the "Tw" timer field.
7357
7358 RC A local resource has been exhausted (memory, sockets, source ports)
7359 preventing the connection to the server from establishing. The error
7360 logs will tell precisely what was missing. This is very rare and can
7361 only be solved by proper system tuning.
7362
7363
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020073648.6. Non-printable characters
7365-----------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007366
7367In order not to cause trouble to log analysis tools or terminals during log
7368consulting, non-printable characters are not sent as-is into log files, but are
7369converted to the two-digits hexadecimal representation of their ASCII code,
7370prefixed by the character '#'. The only characters that can be logged without
7371being escaped are comprised between 32 and 126 (inclusive). Obviously, the
7372escape character '#' itself is also encoded to avoid any ambiguity ("#23"). It
7373is the same for the character '"' which becomes "#22", as well as '{', '|' and
7374'}' when logging headers.
7375
7376Note that the space character (' ') is not encoded in headers, which can cause
7377issues for tools relying on space count to locate fields. A typical header
7378containing spaces is "User-Agent".
7379
7380Last, it has been observed that some syslog daemons such as syslog-ng escape
7381the quote ('"') with a backslash ('\'). The reverse operation can safely be
7382performed since no quote may appear anywhere else in the logs.
7383
7384
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020073858.7. Capturing HTTP cookies
7386---------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007387
7388Cookie capture simplifies the tracking a complete user session. This can be
7389achieved using the "capture cookie" statement in the frontend. Please refer to
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007390section 4.2 for more details. Only one cookie can be captured, and the same
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007391cookie will simultaneously be checked in the request ("Cookie:" header) and in
7392the response ("Set-Cookie:" header). The respective values will be reported in
7393the HTTP logs at the "captured_request_cookie" and "captured_response_cookie"
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007394locations (see section 8.2.3 about HTTP log format). When either cookie is
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007395not seen, a dash ('-') replaces the value. This way, it's easy to detect when a
7396user switches to a new session for example, because the server will reassign it
7397a new cookie. It is also possible to detect if a server unexpectedly sets a
7398wrong cookie to a client, leading to session crossing.
7399
7400 Examples :
7401 # capture the first cookie whose name starts with "ASPSESSION"
7402 capture cookie ASPSESSION len 32
7403
7404 # capture the first cookie whose name is exactly "vgnvisitor"
7405 capture cookie vgnvisitor= len 32
7406
7407
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020074088.8. Capturing HTTP headers
7409---------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007410
7411Header captures are useful to track unique request identifiers set by an upper
7412proxy, virtual host names, user-agents, POST content-length, referrers, etc. In
7413the response, one can search for information about the response length, how the
7414server asked the cache to behave, or an object location during a redirection.
7415
7416Header captures are performed using the "capture request header" and "capture
7417response header" statements in the frontend. Please consult their definition in
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007418section 4.2 for more details.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007419
7420It is possible to include both request headers and response headers at the same
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007421time. Non-existent headers are logged as empty strings, and if one header
7422appears more than once, only its last occurrence will be logged. Request headers
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007423are grouped within braces '{' and '}' in the same order as they were declared,
7424and delimited with a vertical bar '|' without any space. Response headers
7425follow the same representation, but are displayed after a space following the
7426request headers block. These blocks are displayed just before the HTTP request
7427in the logs.
7428
7429 Example :
7430 # This instance chains to the outgoing proxy
7431 listen proxy-out
7432 mode http
7433 option httplog
7434 option logasap
7435 log global
7436 server cache1 192.168.1.1:3128
7437
7438 # log the name of the virtual server
7439 capture request header Host len 20
7440
7441 # log the amount of data uploaded during a POST
7442 capture request header Content-Length len 10
7443
7444 # log the beginning of the referrer
7445 capture request header Referer len 20
7446
7447 # server name (useful for outgoing proxies only)
7448 capture response header Server len 20
7449
7450 # logging the content-length is useful with "option logasap"
7451 capture response header Content-Length len 10
7452
7453 # log the expected cache behaviour on the response
7454 capture response header Cache-Control len 8
7455
7456 # the Via header will report the next proxy's name
7457 capture response header Via len 20
7458
7459 # log the URL location during a redirection
7460 capture response header Location len 20
7461
7462 >>> Aug 9 20:26:09 localhost \
7463 haproxy[2022]: 127.0.0.1:34014 [09/Aug/2004:20:26:09] proxy-out \
7464 proxy-out/cache1 0/0/0/162/+162 200 +350 - - ---- 0/0/0/0/0 0/0 \
7465 {fr.adserver.yahoo.co||http://fr.f416.mail.} {|864|private||} \
7466 "GET http://fr.adserver.yahoo.com/"
7467
7468 >>> Aug 9 20:30:46 localhost \
7469 haproxy[2022]: 127.0.0.1:34020 [09/Aug/2004:20:30:46] proxy-out \
7470 proxy-out/cache1 0/0/0/182/+182 200 +279 - - ---- 0/0/0/0/0 0/0 \
7471 {w.ods.org||} {Formilux/0.1.8|3495|||} \
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007472 "GET http://trafic.1wt.eu/ HTTP/1.1"
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007473
7474 >>> Aug 9 20:30:46 localhost \
7475 haproxy[2022]: 127.0.0.1:34028 [09/Aug/2004:20:30:46] proxy-out \
7476 proxy-out/cache1 0/0/2/126/+128 301 +223 - - ---- 0/0/0/0/0 0/0 \
7477 {www.sytadin.equipement.gouv.fr||http://trafic.1wt.eu/} \
7478 {Apache|230|||http://www.sytadin.} \
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007479 "GET http://www.sytadin.equipement.gouv.fr/ HTTP/1.1"
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007480
7481
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020074828.9. Examples of logs
7483---------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007484
7485These are real-world examples of logs accompanied with an explanation. Some of
7486them have been made up by hand. The syslog part has been removed for better
7487reading. Their sole purpose is to explain how to decipher them.
7488
7489 >>> haproxy[674]: 127.0.0.1:33318 [15/Oct/2003:08:31:57.130] px-http \
7490 px-http/srv1 6559/0/7/147/6723 200 243 - - ---- 5/3/3/1/0 0/0 \
7491 "HEAD / HTTP/1.0"
7492
7493 => long request (6.5s) entered by hand through 'telnet'. The server replied
7494 in 147 ms, and the session ended normally ('----')
7495
7496 >>> haproxy[674]: 127.0.0.1:33319 [15/Oct/2003:08:31:57.149] px-http \
7497 px-http/srv1 6559/1230/7/147/6870 200 243 - - ---- 324/239/239/99/0 \
7498 0/9 "HEAD / HTTP/1.0"
7499
7500 => Idem, but the request was queued in the global queue behind 9 other
7501 requests, and waited there for 1230 ms.
7502
7503 >>> haproxy[674]: 127.0.0.1:33320 [15/Oct/2003:08:32:17.654] px-http \
7504 px-http/srv1 9/0/7/14/+30 200 +243 - - ---- 3/3/3/1/0 0/0 \
7505 "GET /image.iso HTTP/1.0"
7506
7507 => request for a long data transfer. The "logasap" option was specified, so
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007508 the log was produced just before transferring data. The server replied in
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007509 14 ms, 243 bytes of headers were sent to the client, and total time from
7510 accept to first data byte is 30 ms.
7511
7512 >>> haproxy[674]: 127.0.0.1:33320 [15/Oct/2003:08:32:17.925] px-http \
7513 px-http/srv1 9/0/7/14/30 502 243 - - PH-- 3/2/2/0/0 0/0 \
7514 "GET /cgi-bin/bug.cgi? HTTP/1.0"
7515
7516 => the proxy blocked a server response either because of an "rspdeny" or
7517 "rspideny" filter, or because the response was improperly formatted and
7518 not HTTP-compliant, or because it blocked sensible information which
7519 risked being cached. In this case, the response is replaced with a "502
7520 bad gateway". The flags ("PH--") tell us that it was haproxy who decided
7521 to return the 502 and not the server.
7522
7523 >>> haproxy[18113]: 127.0.0.1:34548 [15/Oct/2003:15:18:55.798] px-http \
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007524 px-http/<NOSRV> -1/-1/-1/-1/8490 -1 0 - - CR-- 2/2/2/0/0 0/0 ""
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007525
7526 => the client never completed its request and aborted itself ("C---") after
7527 8.5s, while the proxy was waiting for the request headers ("-R--").
7528 Nothing was sent to any server.
7529
7530 >>> haproxy[18113]: 127.0.0.1:34549 [15/Oct/2003:15:19:06.103] px-http \
7531 px-http/<NOSRV> -1/-1/-1/-1/50001 408 0 - - cR-- 2/2/2/0/0 0/0 ""
7532
7533 => The client never completed its request, which was aborted by the
7534 time-out ("c---") after 50s, while the proxy was waiting for the request
7535 headers ("-R--"). Nothing was sent to any server, but the proxy could
7536 send a 408 return code to the client.
7537
7538 >>> haproxy[18989]: 127.0.0.1:34550 [15/Oct/2003:15:24:28.312] px-tcp \
7539 px-tcp/srv1 0/0/5007 0 cD 0/0/0/0/0 0/0
7540
7541 => This log was produced with "option tcplog". The client timed out after
7542 5 seconds ("c----").
7543
7544 >>> haproxy[18989]: 10.0.0.1:34552 [15/Oct/2003:15:26:31.462] px-http \
7545 px-http/srv1 3183/-1/-1/-1/11215 503 0 - - SC-- 205/202/202/115/3 \
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007546 0/0 "HEAD / HTTP/1.0"
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007547
7548 => The request took 3s to complete (probably a network problem), and the
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007549 connection to the server failed ('SC--') after 4 attempts of 2 seconds
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007550 (config says 'retries 3'), and no redispatch (otherwise we would have
7551 seen "/+3"). Status code 503 was returned to the client. There were 115
7552 connections on this server, 202 connections on this proxy, and 205 on
7553 the global process. It is possible that the server refused the
7554 connection because of too many already established.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01007555
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007556
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020075579. Statistics and monitoring
7558----------------------------
7559
7560It is possible to query HAProxy about its status. The most commonly used
7561mechanism is the HTTP statistics page. This page also exposes an alternative
7562CSV output format for monitoring tools. The same format is provided on the
7563Unix socket.
7564
7565
75669.1. CSV format
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007567---------------
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01007568
Willy Tarreau7f062c42009-03-05 18:43:00 +01007569The statistics may be consulted either from the unix socket or from the HTTP
7570page. Both means provide a CSV format whose fields follow.
7571
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01007572 0. pxname: proxy name
7573 1. svname: service name (FRONTEND for frontend, BACKEND for backend, any name
7574 for server)
7575 2. qcur: current queued requests
7576 3. qmax: max queued requests
7577 4. scur: current sessions
7578 5. smax: max sessions
7579 6. slim: sessions limit
7580 7. stot: total sessions
7581 8. bin: bytes in
7582 9. bout: bytes out
7583 10. dreq: denied requests
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki2c6962c2008-03-02 02:42:14 +01007584 11. dresp: denied responses
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01007585 12. ereq: request errors
7586 13. econ: connection errors
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki2c6962c2008-03-02 02:42:14 +01007587 14. eresp: response errors
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01007588 15. wretr: retries (warning)
7589 16. wredis: redispatches (warning)
7590 17. status: status (UP/DOWN/...)
7591 18. weight: server weight (server), total weight (backend)
7592 19. act: server is active (server), number of active servers (backend)
7593 20. bck: server is backup (server), number of backup servers (backend)
7594 21. chkfail: number of failed checks
7595 22. chkdown: number of UP->DOWN transitions
7596 23. lastchg: last status change (in seconds)
7597 24. downtime: total downtime (in seconds)
7598 25. qlimit: queue limit
7599 26. pid: process id (0 for first instance, 1 for second, ...)
7600 27. iid: unique proxy id
7601 28. sid: service id (unique inside a proxy)
7602 29. throttle: warm up status
7603 30. lbtot: total number of times a server was selected
7604 31. tracked: id of proxy/server if tracking is enabled
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiaeebf9b2009-10-04 15:43:17 +02007605 32. type (0=frontend, 1=backend, 2=server, 3=socket)
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkidb57c6b2009-08-31 21:23:27 +02007606 33. rate: number of sessions per second over last elapsed second
7607 34. rate_lim: limit on new sessions per second
7608 35. rate_max: max number of new sessions per second
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki09605412009-09-23 22:09:24 +02007609 36. check_status: status of last health check, one of:
7610 UNK -> unknown
7611 INI -> initializing
7612 SOCKERR -> socket error
7613 L4OK -> check passed on layer 4, no upper layers testing enabled
7614 L4TMOUT -> layer 1-4 timeout
7615 L4CON -> layer 1-4 connection problem, for example "Connection refused"
7616 (tcp rst) or "No route to host" (icmp)
7617 L6OK -> check passed on layer 6
7618 L6TOUT -> layer 6 (SSL) timeout
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007619 L6RSP -> layer 6 invalid response - protocol error
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki09605412009-09-23 22:09:24 +02007620 L7OK -> check passed on layer 7
7621 L7OKC -> check conditionally passed on layer 7, for example 404 with
7622 disable-on-404
7623 L7TOUT -> layer 7 (HTTP/SMTP) timeout
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007624 L7RSP -> layer 7 invalid response - protocol error
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki09605412009-09-23 22:09:24 +02007625 L7STS -> layer 7 response error, for example HTTP 5xx
7626 37. check_code: layer5-7 code, if available
7627 38. check_duration: time in ms took to finish last health check
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007628 39. hrsp_1xx: http responses with 1xx code
7629 40. hrsp_2xx: http responses with 2xx code
7630 41. hrsp_3xx: http responses with 3xx code
7631 42. hrsp_4xx: http responses with 4xx code
7632 43. hrsp_5xx: http responses with 5xx code
7633 44. hrsp_other: http responses with other codes (protocol error)
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01007634
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007635
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020076369.2. Unix Socket commands
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007637-------------------------
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki2c6962c2008-03-02 02:42:14 +01007638
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007639The following commands are supported on the UNIX stats socket ; all of them
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007640must be terminated by a line feed. The socket supports pipelining, so that it
7641is possible to chain multiple commands at once provided they are delimited by
7642a semi-colon or a line feed, although the former is more reliable as it has no
7643risk of being truncated over the network. The responses themselves will each be
7644followed by an empty line, so it will be easy for an external script to match a
7645given response with a given request. By default one command line is processed
7646then the connection closes, but there is an interactive allowing multiple lines
7647to be issued one at a time.
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007648
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007649It is important to understand that when multiple haproxy processes are started
7650on the same sockets, any process may pick up the request and will output its
7651own stats.
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007652
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007653help
7654 Print the list of known keywords and their basic usage. The same help screen
7655 is also displayed for unknown commands.
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007656
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007657prompt
7658 Toggle the prompt at the beginning of the line and enter or leave interactive
7659 mode. In interactive mode, the connection is not closed after a command
7660 completes. Instead, the prompt will appear again, indicating the user that
7661 the interpreter is waiting for a new command. The prompt consists in a right
7662 angle bracket followed by a space "> ". This mode is particularly convenient
7663 when one wants to periodically check information such as stats or errors.
7664 It is also a good idea to enter interactive mode before issuing a "help"
7665 command.
7666
7667quit
7668 Close the connection when in interactive mode.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki2c6962c2008-03-02 02:42:14 +01007669
Willy Tarreaue0c8a1a2009-03-04 16:33:10 +01007670show errors [<iid>]
7671 Dump last known request and response errors collected by frontends and
7672 backends. If <iid> is specified, the limit the dump to errors concerning
Willy Tarreau6162db22009-10-10 17:13:00 +02007673 either frontend or backend whose ID is <iid>. This command is restricted
7674 and can only be issued on sockets configured for levels "operator" or
7675 "admin".
Willy Tarreaue0c8a1a2009-03-04 16:33:10 +01007676
7677 The errors which may be collected are the last request and response errors
7678 caused by protocol violations, often due to invalid characters in header
7679 names. The report precisely indicates what exact character violated the
7680 protocol. Other important information such as the exact date the error was
7681 detected, frontend and backend names, the server name (when known), the
7682 internal session ID and the source address which has initiated the session
7683 are reported too.
7684
7685 All characters are returned, and non-printable characters are encoded. The
7686 most common ones (\t = 9, \n = 10, \r = 13 and \e = 27) are encoded as one
7687 letter following a backslash. The backslash itself is encoded as '\\' to
7688 avoid confusion. Other non-printable characters are encoded '\xNN' where
7689 NN is the two-digits hexadecimal representation of the character's ASCII
7690 code.
7691
7692 Lines are prefixed with the position of their first character, starting at 0
7693 for the beginning of the buffer. At most one input line is printed per line,
7694 and large lines will be broken into multiple consecutive output lines so that
7695 the output never goes beyond 79 characters wide. It is easy to detect if a
7696 line was broken, because it will not end with '\n' and the next line's offset
7697 will be followed by a '+' sign, indicating it is a continuation of previous
7698 line.
7699
7700 Example :
7701 >>> $ echo "show errors" | socat stdio /tmp/sock1
7702 [04/Mar/2009:15:46:56.081] backend http-in (#2) : invalid response
7703 src 127.0.0.1, session #54, frontend fe-eth0 (#1), server s2 (#1)
7704 response length 213 bytes, error at position 23:
7705
7706 00000 HTTP/1.0 200 OK\r\n
7707 00017 header/bizarre:blah\r\n
7708 00038 Location: blah\r\n
7709 00054 Long-line: this is a very long line which should b
7710 00104+ e broken into multiple lines on the output buffer,
7711 00154+ otherwise it would be too large to print in a ter
7712 00204+ minal\r\n
7713 00211 \r\n
7714
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007715 In the example above, we see that the backend "http-in" which has internal
Willy Tarreaue0c8a1a2009-03-04 16:33:10 +01007716 ID 2 has blocked an invalid response from its server s2 which has internal
7717 ID 1. The request was on session 54 initiated by source 127.0.0.1 and
7718 received by frontend fe-eth0 whose ID is 1. The total response length was
7719 213 bytes when the error was detected, and the error was at byte 23. This
7720 is the slash ('/') in header name "header/bizarre", which is not a valid
7721 HTTP character for a header name.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki2c6962c2008-03-02 02:42:14 +01007722
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007723show info
7724 Dump info about haproxy status on current process.
7725
7726show sess
7727 Dump all known sessions. Avoid doing this on slow connections as this can
Willy Tarreau6162db22009-10-10 17:13:00 +02007728 be huge. This command is restricted and can only be issued on sockets
7729 configured for levels "operator" or "admin".
7730
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007731
7732show stat [<iid> <type> <sid>]
7733 Dump statistics in the CSV format. By passing <id>, <type> and <sid>, it is
7734 possible to dump only selected items :
7735 - <iid> is a proxy ID, -1 to dump everything
7736 - <type> selects the type of dumpable objects : 1 for frontends, 2 for
7737 backends, 4 for servers, -1 for everything. These values can be ORed,
7738 for example:
7739 1 + 2 = 3 -> frontend + backend.
7740 1 + 2 + 4 = 7 -> frontend + backend + server.
7741 - <sid> is a server ID, -1 to dump everything from the selected proxy.
7742
7743 Example :
7744 >>> $ echo "show info;show stat" | socat stdio unix-connect:/tmp/sock1
7745 Name: HAProxy
7746 Version: 1.4-dev2-49
7747 Release_date: 2009/09/23
7748 Nbproc: 1
7749 Process_num: 1
7750 (...)
7751
7752 # pxname,svname,qcur,qmax,scur,smax,slim,stot,bin,bout,dreq, (...)
7753 stats,FRONTEND,,,0,0,1000,0,0,0,0,0,0,,,,,OPEN,,,,,,,,,1,1,0, (...)
7754 stats,BACKEND,0,0,0,0,1000,0,0,0,0,0,,0,0,0,0,UP,0,0,0,,0,250,(...)
7755 (...)
7756 www1,BACKEND,0,0,0,0,1000,0,0,0,0,0,,0,0,0,0,UP,1,1,0,,0,250, (...)
7757
7758 $
7759
7760 Here, two commands have been issued at once. That way it's easy to find
7761 which process the stats apply to in multi-process mode. Notice the empty
7762 line after the information output which marks the end of the first block.
7763 A similar empty line appears at the end of the second block (stats) so that
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007764 the reader knows the output has not been truncated.
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007765
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki719e7262009-10-04 15:02:46 +02007766clear counters
Willy Tarreau2f6bf2b2009-10-10 15:26:26 +02007767 Clear the max values of the statistics counters in each proxy (frontend &
7768 backend) and in each server. The cumulated counters are not affected. This
7769 can be used to get clean counters after an incident, without having to
Willy Tarreau6162db22009-10-10 17:13:00 +02007770 restart nor to clear traffic counters. This command is restricted and can
7771 only be issued on sockets configured for levels "operator" or "admin".
Willy Tarreau2f6bf2b2009-10-10 15:26:26 +02007772
7773clear counters all
7774 Clear all statistics counters in each proxy (frontend & backend) and in each
Willy Tarreau6162db22009-10-10 17:13:00 +02007775 server. This has the same effect as restarting. This command is restricted
7776 and can only be issued on sockets configured for level "admin".
7777
Cyril Bontécd19e512010-01-31 22:34:03 +01007778disable server <backend>/<server>
7779 Mark the server DOWN for maintenance. In this mode, no more checks will be
7780 performed on the server until it leaves maintenance.
7781 If the server is tracked by other servers, those servers will be set to DOWN
7782 during the maintenance.
7783
7784 Both the backend and the server may be specified either by their name or by
7785 their numeric ID, prefixed with a dash ('#').
7786
7787 This command is restricted and can only be issued on sockets configured for
7788 level "admin".
7789
7790enable server <backend>/<server>
7791 If the server was previously marked as DOWN for maintenance, this marks the
7792 server UP and checks are re-enabled.
7793
7794 Both the backend and the server may be specified either by their name or by
7795 their numeric ID, prefixed with a dash ('#').
7796
7797 This command is restricted and can only be issued on sockets configured for
7798 level "admin".
7799
Willy Tarreau38338fa2009-10-10 18:37:29 +02007800get weight <backend>/<server>
7801 Report the current weight and the initial weight of server <server> in
7802 backend <backend> or an error if either doesn't exist. The initial weight is
7803 the one that appears in the configuration file. Both are normally equal
Willy Tarreaucfeaa472009-10-10 22:33:08 +02007804 unless the current weight has been changed. Both the backend and the server
7805 may be specified either by their name or by their numeric ID, prefixed with a
7806 dash ('#').
Willy Tarreau38338fa2009-10-10 18:37:29 +02007807
Willy Tarreau7aabd112010-01-26 10:59:06 +01007808set timeout cli <delay>
7809 Change the CLI interface timeout for current connection. This can be useful
7810 during long debugging sessions where the user needs to constantly inspect
7811 some indicators without being disconnected. The delay is passed in seconds.
7812
Willy Tarreau4483d432009-10-10 19:30:08 +02007813set weight <backend>/<server> <weight>[%]
7814 Change a server's weight to the value passed in argument. If the value ends
7815 with the '%' sign, then the new weight will be relative to the initially
7816 configured weight. Relative weights are only permitted between 0 and 100%,
7817 and absolute weights are permitted between 0 and 256. Servers which are part
7818 of a farm running a static load-balancing algorithm have stricter limitations
7819 because the weight cannot change once set. Thus for these servers, the only
7820 accepted values are 0 and 100% (or 0 and the initial weight). Changes take
7821 effect immediately, though certain LB algorithms require a certain amount of
7822 requests to consider changes. A typical usage of this command is to disable
7823 a server during an update by setting its weight to zero, then to enable it
7824 again after the update by setting it back to 100%. This command is restricted
Willy Tarreaucfeaa472009-10-10 22:33:08 +02007825 and can only be issued on sockets configured for level "admin". Both the
7826 backend and the server may be specified either by their name or by their
7827 numeric ID, prefixed with a dash ('#').
Willy Tarreau4483d432009-10-10 19:30:08 +02007828
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki719e7262009-10-04 15:02:46 +02007829
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01007830/*
7831 * Local variables:
7832 * fill-column: 79
7833 * End:
7834 */